AHD-Katalog En 090310

DEVELOPMENT MANUFACTURING SERVICE FOR SHIPPING AND INDUSTRY

Alarm systems centralized and decentralized Binary and analog data stations Data distributors LCD-monitors Dimmers Earth fault monitoring systems Bow thruster controls Position- and signal lantern controls Safety-systems for ship main engines 10A Impulse length dimmer Start-Stop Diesel control systems AHD 601 for 24VDC, St.-by-pump- and compressor controls operation with photo resistor, Thermo-element amplifier potentiometer or pushbutton Alarm - and safety -system Tank level and content measurement AHD 414A Devices for customer requirements

Alarm - and display system KOMPAKT EDA 47 with illuminated and automatically dimmed text fields and binary data station PS 47-1 for 47 inputs

PS 47-1 AHD 406, KOMPAKT EDA 47 control device with 10 illuminated Diesel - and start-stop- automatically automatic dimmed text AHD 414 fields

AHD 408E, St. - by-pump- control for two independently working pairs of pumps

Decentralized position - and signal lantern control and LCD -monitor AHD 524 with monitoring unit DPS 01 for up automatically dimmed background to 32 monitored lamp circuits illumination

Development, manufacturing, service for shipping and industry Böning Automationstechnologie GmbH & Co. KG • Am Steenöver 4 • D-27777 Ganderkesee ©10.03.2009, SoT-1605 Phone: +49(0)4221 9475-0 • Fax: +49(0)4221 9475-22 • Internet: www.boening.com • E-Mail: [email protected] TABLE OF CONTENTS

This catalog gives a general overview of our product range. For some of the devices, more detailed information is available on request.

1. Alarm and Display Systems Alarm System KOMPAKT EDA 47 for 47 Alarms 1 Group Alarm System for 10 Groups AHD 406H 2 Monitoring and Control Device for 10 Alarms AHD 406 3 Alarm System for 10 Alarms AHD 414A 4 Alarm System AHD 530 with Serial Input 5 Decentralized Data Collection with AHD 903-15 and Display on LCD-Monitor AHD 524 6 Chamber and Mess Room Panel AHD 406-2 7

2. Diesel Engine Controls and Safety Systems Start-Stop Diesel Monitoring Automatic AHD 414 8 Emergency Power Automatic AHD 414 with Mains + Generator Power Supervision AHD 414NG 9 Alarm and Safety System for 10 Alarms AHD 414A 4

3. St.-by Pump and Compressor Controls AHD 408 Series St.-by Pump Control for two Pairs of Pumps AHD 408E 10 St.-by Pump Control for two Electrical St.-By Pumps (Attached Main Pump) AHD 408A 10 St.-by Pump and Compressor Control AHD 408E-K 10

4. Data Stations, Data Distributors and Amplifiers for Thermocouples Binary Data Station PS 47-1-15 for 15 Inputs 11 Binary Data Station PS 47-1 for 47 Inputs 12 Analog Data Station AHD 903-15 with Relay Unit AHD 903R 13 Data Distributor AHD W (Version A) 14 Data Distributor AHD W (Version B) 15 Amplifier for 14 Thermocouples NiCrNi AHD 903 V 16 Relay Station with 15 Relays and Serial Energizing Type AHD R101 17

5. Dimmer Impulse Length Dimmer AHD 601, 24V/10A, for Rail Mounting 18

6. Isolation Control Isolation Control Device AHD 519 19

7. Position- and Signal Lantern Control Modular Position- and Signal Latnern Control DPS 01 for 8 to 32 Lanterns 20

8. Bow Thruster Controls Decentralized Bow Thruster Control for Slip Ring Rotor Engines 21 Control for Bow Thrusters with Variable Pitch Propellers 22

9. Example of Use Exhaust Gas Average Value Control for Diesel Engines 23

Development, manufacturing, service for shipping and industry Am Steenöver 4 • D-27777 Ganderkesee • Phone: +49(0)4221 9475-0 • Fax: +49(0)4221 9475-21 /-22 internet: www.boening.com • mail: [email protected] Description starts on highway A1

- Exit „Groß Mackenstedt“ towards Oldenburg (final destination is marked with red arrows, see drawing upper right corner of the map) - Keep going on A 1 until exit „Delmenhorst Ost, Groß Mackenstedt“ - Follow feeder road B 322 towards „Delmenhorst/ Oldenburg“ for 4,3 km - Stay in left lane at inter- connection A 28, after 7,6 km take exit „Ganderkesee Ost“ - Go right towards „Schierbrok/ Hoykenkamp“ („Almsloher Str.“) - After 2,2 km turn right at next traffic circle (direction „Delmenhorst/ Hoykenkamp“) - After 200 m go left onto the first road („Auf dem Hohenborn“) - Proceed straight through the village of „Elmeloh“, after 2 km turn left at the end of the road

towards “Bookholzberg” (“Schierbroker Landstraße“) - After 500 m turn left onto „Am Buschhagen“ - At road’s end turn left onto „Am Steenöver“ before arriving at the third building on the lefthand side.

ALARM AND DISPLAY SYSTEM KOMPAKT EDA 47

- Device for control desk mounting, front dimensions 192mm x 144mm. - 48 illuminated and automatically dimmed text fields (40mm x 10mm), of which 47 can be used arbitrarily. - Low costs for labeling, due to only one film-negative for all measuring points; only the text is illuminated; empty fields (see measuring points 2 and 4) are opaque. - Every report can be programmed as alarm or display. - 5 inputs for suppression of arbitrary reports. - Delays for switching on and off between 1 and 99 sec. - Every text field is illuminated by display elements into which 16 LEDs are integrated. - Low wiring effort due to serial data entry. - Connection with ribbon cable and terminal block (part of delivery) - Integrated horn. - One relay output each for horn and collective report. - GL classification

KOMPAKT EDA 47 Page

1. General 2

2. Construction 2

3. Function 2

3.1 Data collection 2

3.2 Alarms/Messages 3

3.3 Reset/lamp test 3

3.4 Test 3

3.5 Alarm blocking 3

3.6 Switch-on/switch-off delays 3

3.7 NO or NC contact 3

3.8 Grouping 3

3.9 Dimming of the text field 4

3.10 Data collection via 2 serial inputs 4

4. Measuring point list and programming 4

Measuring point list 5

Installation dimensions and terminal diagram 6

Technical data 6

Programming table 7

Example: Kompakt EDA 47 with binary data station PS 47-1 8

1 1. General

Kompakt EDA 47 is a microprocessor controlled device for control desk mounting which is mainly used as alarm system on ships. Data is received serially from binary or analog data stations or from a data distributor AHD W. The bridge is the suitable installation site on board for this device because of the illuminated and automatically dimmed text fields. Serial data collection minimizes the required wiring between ECR and bridge. This feature is especially important for ships with lift-up bridges where wiring is not only expensive but also easily damaged.

Every text field has dimensions of 40 x 10 mm which enables the texts to be easily read. The whole text field is designed as a film-negative for 48 measuring points. The text is illuminated from below when the corresponding measuring point is activated. This text-film can be removed and exchanged effortlessly. The costs for a new text- film are low, so that the system and texts can be easily redesigned, if necessary.

2. Assembly

Kompakt EDA 47 consists of 2 electronic cards above each other. The upper card is almost completely covered with surface LED elements. Every monitored measuring point consists of two such elements (16 individual LEDs each). The components are plugged onto IC sockets and can easily be exchanged. They are available in red, green or yellow.

The text field lies directly on the flat LED components (film negative). It is protected by a glass front cover fixed in a frame.

The second electronic card is located on the rear of the case. It contains the processor system and all peripheral components. The cards are interconnected by a 60-pole ribbon cable. The EEprom (28C64) is located on the rear of the card and can be removed for modifications to the system‘s function. It contains the system software, as well as an area for user-specific data.

All inputs and outputs are transmitted to a transfer unit (terminal block) by means of a 20-pole ribbon cable.

3. Function

3.1 Data collection

Kompakt EDA 47 can be addressed serially by the following devices:

- binary data station PS 47-1-(08; 12; 15) for 8, 12 or 15 binary inputs. - binary data station PS 47-1 for 47 binary inputs. - analog data station AHD 903-15 - data distributor AHD W

The easiest application is data capturing by a PS-47-1. Here inputs 1 to 47 correspond to the terminal numbers of the data station and the measuring point numbers in the Kompakt EDA 47 device (see page 9 of this description).

Other data stations are normally used in combination with a data distributor AHD W for larger decentralized systems. In this case, the assignment of the inputs on the substations can be programmed arbitrarily for up to 8 Kompakt EDA 47 systems (376 measuring points).

2 3.2 Alarms/Messages

Every measuring point can be programmed to release either an alarm or a message. The measuring point flashes in the event of an alarm. Furthermore the horn, the integrated buzzer and the collective alarm relays are activated. In the event of an alarm being activated while a previous one has not yet been reset, the latest alarm will flash with half the normal frequency. This is an important feature since the second alarm is often a consequence of the previous one. The routine enables recognition of the alarm sequence.

Where the measuring point is programmed as a message it is represented by a steady light and no relay is switched.

3.3 Reset/Lamp test

Alarms must first be acknowledged acoustically, then optically. The internal buzzer and the horn relay are switched off by acoustic acknowledgement. The optical acknowledgement causes the flashing text field to show steady light instead. This sequence is mandatory, as during switched-on horn the optical reset function is blocked.

The whole text field is illuminated by pushing the lamp test button.

3.4 Test

Kompakt EDA 47 has an input with the assigned function TEST. When this input is activated, all text fields are illuminated.

3.5 Alarm blocking

Each measuring point can be blocked or activated by the first 5 measuring points. It is therefore useful to assign operational functions to them (i.e. main motor is running, auxilliary diesel no.1 is running,...) as they usually determine if a measuring point is blocked or activated. Multiple blocking of a measuring point is possible.

3.6 Switch-on/switch-off delays

Time delays between 1 and 90 seconds can be programmed independently for both alarms and messages.

3.7 NO/NC inputs

Every measuring point can be programmed to handle NO or NC contact. If analog data stations (e.g. AHD 903- 15) are used, all inputs are programmed as NO contacts, irrespective of whether the message is to be shown at rising or falling signal or both.

3.8 Grouping

Kompakt EDA 47 has a serial output (terminal 3) by which the processed data is led. It is connected to a group panel AHD 406H where, among others, 10 arbitrarily programmable groups can be formed. Up to 3 KOMPAKT EDA 47 can be connected to a group panel AHD 406H. Grouping with a higher resolution is furthermore possible by using one KOMPAKT EDA 47 device as group panel as well. Special software is available for this purpose. Up to 3 KOMPAKT EDA 47 devices can be connected to a group panel with the same designation (48 groups consisting of 144 individual messages).

3 3.9 Dimming of the text field

The front panel of the device contains a photo resistor of about 5 mm diameter. It registers the ambient brightness. The evaluation electronics is part of the bottom card. There is a trim pot at the rear of the device by which the brightness of the text field can be adjusted. There is no dimming in daylight conditions.

3.10 Data collection via 2 serial inputs

Sometimes it is more economic to register the inputs e.g. by two data stations PS 47-1 in order to minimize wiring, because the sensors may be located far away from each other. In this case, data station 1 is connected to serial input 1 and data station 2 is connected to serial input 2. Inputs of the same channel number from both data stations are thus OR-concatenated, as long as this is provided in the programmed configuration (see last page of this description). Further input blockings can thereby be realized insofar as the connected switches are normally closed. Where they are normally open, they can activate measuring points from either of the data stations.

4. Measuring point lists and programming

Measuring point lists are the basis for the design and programming of alarm systems and are completed by the customer.

The devices are programmed according to the customer’s requirements. Modifications to the program are sometimes necessary on site during commissioning, which can also be carried out by the customer.

Our documentation includes a programming table for adaptation of the KOMPAKT EDA 47 to existing systems. This is facilitated by a standard programming device with PC-connection, e.g. the battery operated S4 device.

An EEprom type 28C64 is plugged into an IC-socket at the rear of the KOMPAKT EDA 47 housing. The EEprom is removed, plugged into the programming device and its program copied . After modification (editing of storage addresses), the EEprom is reprogrammed and reinserted into the KOMPAKT EDA 47. Programming with the S4 device takes about 2 seconds.

4 y the en the nningmain EDAMU-e.MCD orientation Digitsonly serve as noentry if nothing isprinted grouppanel, 1 - 10 atAHD 406H 1- 48 if CompactEDA 47 is used as 4 Print ? Group no entry inthis case 1 - 90s,basic delay is 2s, like delay of switching-on 3 delay delay Input Output no entry in caseof alarm suppressing measuring point ist activated(e. g. ru engine).Inversion is possible. Everymeasuring point can be suppressed (blocked) b measuringpoints 1-5. Theblocking is cancelled, wh 2 Alarm Suppr. Display ofinput if NC(quiescent current and/orN/C-contact) noentry red, yellow orgreen (red= no entry) 1 Failure data Failure transfer NC NO LED- Colour 44 04 48 32 08 12 16 20 36 28 24 Measuring point text Meas. point-no. corresponds to term. no. ofPS 47-1(1 bis 47),as faras applicable. XX 43 47 35 27 03 15 23 out out of pages) .... 3 3 3 1822 19 3842 46 39 40 3034 31 26 10 11 4 4 4 4 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 : : : : : : 01 02 37 41 45 29 33 25 0509 1317 21 06 14 07 Measuringpoint list for CompactEDA 47 (Page .... Client Shipyard Newbuilding of ship Name Com.-no. Date

M4-e.MCD p IP54) p

: app. 0,2A (all text fields altog. app. 1.2A) 1.2A) app. altog. fields text (all 0,2A app. : Technical data

Power supply supply Power electronic of consumption Current +/-25% 24VDC : InputsOutputsoutputs relay of Chargeability front at protection of Degree 1A / 50V : depthInstallation front-ca (with IP23, : cutawayPanel Weight binary x 4 (TTY), serial x 3 : serial x 4 relays, 2 : 75mm : 137mm x 185mm : 1kg app. : 50 53 deep 53 60 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 18 14 16 10 12 8 4 6 2 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 17 13 15 11 9 5 7 1 3 20-pole ribbon cable ribbon 20-pole 20-pole terminal block terminal 20-pole rails on mountable TS35 and TS32 EEprom darkness at dimming of justment Trimmer potentiometer for ad- for potentiometer Trimmer 75 61

f REPORT COLLECT.

Failure Data T HORN HORN

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48

INTERNAL SERIAL INPUT 2 INPUT SERIAL

15 16 17 18 19 20 19 18 17 16 15 SERIAL INPUT 1 INPUT SERIAL

Ribbon cable

SERIAL INPUT 3 (PRINTER) 3 INPUT SERIAL OPTIC ACKN. OPTIC

3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 35 39 43 47

194 TEST LAMP

HORN ACKN. HORN TEST

Installation measurements and connection plan SERIAL OUTPUT. 3 OUTPUT. SERIAL

SERIAL OUTPUT. 2 OUTPUT. SERIAL

2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 34 38 42 46 GROUPS) (FOR 1 OUTP. SERIAL - 24VDC±25% + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 37 41 45 146

6 PROGRAMMING TABLE FOR DECENTRALISED ALARM SYSTEM KOMPAKT EDA 47

Client : ...... Order-no. of client :...... Device-no.: ...... Komp1-e Newbuilding : ...... Input Alarm (00) NC (00) ( )a Switching-on ( )b Switching -off Suppression by input ( )c ( )b Display (01) NO (01) delay delay

1 2 3 4 5 1 1E30 1E00 1E60 1860 1E90 1EC0 1EF0 1F20 1F50 2 1E31 1E01 1E61 1861 1E91 1EC1 1EF1 1F21 1F51 3 1E32 1E02 1E62 1862 1E92 1EC2 1EF2 1F22 1F52 4 1E33 1E03 1E63 1863 1E93 1EC3 1EF3 1F23 1F53 5 1E34 1E04 1E64 1864 1E94 1EC4 1EF4 1F24 1F54 6 1E35 1E05 1E65 1865 1E95 1EC5 1EF5 1F25 1F55 7 1E36 1E06 1E66 1866 1E96 1EC6 1EF6 1F26 1F56 8 1E37 1E07 1E67 1867 1E97 1EC7 1EF7 1F27 1F57 9 1E38 1E08 1E68 1868 1E98 1EC8 1EF8 1F28 1F58 10 1E39 1E09 1E69 1869 1E99 1EC9 1EF9 1F29 1F59 11 1E3A 1E0A 1E6A 186A 1E9A 1ECA 1EFA 1F2A 1F5A 12 1E3B 1E0B 1E6B 186B 1E9B 1ECB 1EFB 1F2B 1F5B 13 1E3C 1E0C 1E6C 186C 1E9C 1ECC 1EFC 1F2C 1F5C 14 1E3D 1E0D 1E6D 186D 1E9D 1ECD 1EFD 1F2D 1F5D 15 1E3E 1E0E 1E6E 186E 1E9E 1ECE 1EFE 1F2E 1F5E 16 1E3F 1E0F 1E6F 186F 1E9F 1ECF 1EFF 1F2F 1F5F 17 1E40 1E10 1E70 1870 1EA0 1ED0 1F00 1F30 1F60 18 1E41 1E11 1E71 1871 1EA1 1ED1 1F01 1F31 1F61 19 1E42 1E12 1E72 1872 1EA2 1ED2 1F02 1F32 1F62 20 1E43 1E13 1E73 1873 1EA3 1ED3 1F03 1F33 1F63 21 1E44 1E14 1E74 1874 1EA4 1ED4 1F04 1F34 1F64 22 1E45 1E15 1E75 1875 1EA5 1ED5 1F05 1F35 1F65 23 1E46 1E16 1E76 1876 1EA6 1ED6 1F06 1F36 1F66 24 1E47 1E17 1E77 1877 1EA7 1ED7 1F07 1F37 1F67 25 1E48 1E18 1E78 1878 1EA8 1ED8 1F08 1F38 1F68 26 1E49 1E19 1E79 1879 1EA9 1ED9 1F09 1F39 1F69 27 1E4A 1E1A 1E7A 187A 1EAA 1EDA 1F0A 1F3A 1F6A 28 1E4B 1E1B 1E7B 187B 1EAB 1EDB 1F0B 1F3B 1F6B 29 1E4C 1E1C 1E7C 187C 1EAC 1EDC 1F0C 1F3C 1F6C 30 1E4D 1E1D 1E7D 187D 1EAD 1EDD 1F0D 1F3D 1F6D 31 1E4E 1E1E 1E7E 187E 1EAE 1EDE 1F0E 1F3E 1F6E 32 1E4F 1E1F 1E7F 187F 1EAF 1EDF 1F0F 1F3F 1F6F 33 1E50 1E20 1E80 1880 1EB0 1EE0 1F10 1F40 1F70 34 1E51 1E21 1E81 1881 1EB1 1EE1 1F11 1F41 1F71 35 1E52 1E22 1E82 1882 1EB2 1EE2 1F12 1F42 1F72 36 1E53 1E23 1E83 1883 1EB3 1EE3 1F13 1F43 1F73 37 1E54 1E24 1E84 1884 1EB4 1EE4 1F14 1F44 1F74 38 1E55 1E25 1E85 1885 1EB5 1EE5 1F15 1F45 1F75 39 1E56 1E26 1E86 1886 1EB6 1EE6 1F16 1F46 1F76 40 1E57 1E27 1E87 1887 1EB7 1EE7 1F17 1F47 1F77 41 1E58 1E28 1E88 1888 1EB8 1EE8 1F18 1F48 1F78 42 1E59 1E29 1E89 1889 1EB9 1EE9 1F19 1F49 1F79 43 1E5A 1E2A 1E8A 188A 1EBA 1EEA 1F1A 1F4A 1F7A 44 1E5B 1E2B 1E8B 188B 1EBB 1EEB 1F1B 1F4B 1F7B 45 1E5C 1E2C 1E8C 188C 1EBC 1EEC 1F1C 1F4C 1F7C 46 1E5D 1E2D 1E8D 188D 1EBD 1EED 1F1D 1F4D 1F7D 47 1E5E 1E2E 1E8E 188E 1EBE 1EEE 1F1E 1F4E 1F7E "48" 1E5F 1E2F 1E8F 188F 1EBF 1EEF 1F1F 1F4F 1F7F komp1 - The storage addresses are indicated on the left side of each column. The data is entered Into the empty fields on the right side corresponding to the individual requirements. All empty fields have the content "00". - The input marked "48" is activated, when the data conduit between transmitter and Compact EDA is interrupted. a) NC: Report is executed at open contact or falling analog measuring point; the content of the storage address has to be "00". NO: Report is executed at closed contact or rising analog measuring point; the content of the storage address has to be "01". b) Content of the storage address corresponds appr. to the delay time in seconds. If a Compact EDA 47 device is directly connected to the data station PS 47-1, the content (if > 10s) has to be increased by 10%, which means that the content of the storage cell for a delay of 20s is 22s. Entering is executed decimally. The maximum content is 99. c) Every input can be suppressed by the inputs 1 to 5. Example: measuring point 1 →auxiliary diesel engine 1 in operation; measuring point 8→ auxiliary diesel engine 1 oil pressure leakage; measuring point 8 shall be suppressed by measuring point 1, when engine is not running. Content of the storage address 1E97 has to be "01". The suppression is cancelled when the report „auxiliary diesel engine in operation“ is released and the corresponding delay time has elapsed. The assignment of the suppressed measuring points to the „suppressing inputs“ is executed by entering „01“ into the relevant storage addresses. This means if measuring point 27 is to be suppressed by input 5, the content „01“ is also entered into the storage address 1F6A (not "05"). Multiple suppressing of one measuring point is permitted.

R3e.MCD 8 59 60 24VDC±25%

+ + - 2x0,5Amt BZX 33 560Ohm internal connection 48-pole terminal block with pre- with block terminal 48-pole the of decoupling for resistors an for used not is It contacts. case, this In connection. a-polar connection mutual the is 48 terminal View "A" DecentralizedAlarm System KompaktEDA Binary with 47 DataStation PS 47-1 97 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 5049 48 47 46 45 44 42 41 43 51 5253 54 55 56 57 5 48 47 46 45 44 42 41 43 easu-

n 33

7 R3E.mcd

a 32 33 35 34 36 3738 39 40 32 33 35 34 36 37 38 39 40

n guide rail

i Column with

m t the blocktterminal the

n -

)

r t

s a

t 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60

33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59

)

h 198 210

o 15 16 17 1819 20 2122 2324 25 2726 28 3029 31 15 1617 1819 20 2122 23 24 25 2726 28 3029 31 t t terminals correspond to the numbers of the m

(

u Electronic card (pluggable)

u : t

s 1

o :

c 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1715 19 21 2325 27 29 31

n 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1618 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

o PS 47-1

h -

g g

h i

n Thenumbers of the inpu

( B r FUNCTION: transforms PS the 47-1 impending inputs a optocoupler. Binarydata station PS 47-1

i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 119 10 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 119 10 1312 14

: 24VDC +/-25% : appr. 0.3A : 47 binary overx optocoupler : 1 x : serial x 1 : IP00: : appr.: 1kg 145 NC/NO

t 50 c

l View "A"

0 c

i Technical Data

2 t

53deep

t 60

2 4 6 2 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

3 1 3 5 7 1 911 15 13 19 17

20-pole ribbon cable ribbon 20-pole o

20-pole terminal block, terminal 20-pole on rail mountable and TS35 TS32

i EEpromm at darkness dimming Trim-pot for adjustment of adjustment for Trim-pot

a n

m c

r Power supply Power supply Consumptionelectronics of the Inputs Outputs Weight Degreeof protection

i 75

s 61

t serialdata wire

o terminalblock will be connected with terminal 14 If more than one Compact EDA 47 device shall be be shall device 47 EDA Compact one than more If

c o

The terminalnumbers of PS 47-1 correspondto thetext field numbers ofKompakt EDA 47. COLLECTIVE REPORT COLLECTIVE

Failure Data- Failure HORN HORN : 24VDC : +/-25% 24VDC : appr. 0.2A: textfields (allappr. together appr. 1.2A) : 3 x serial :(TTY),serial x 3binary x 4 1kg : appr. : 2 relays, 4: relays,serial x 2 (with :front IP23, IP54)cap transm. 47-1) (PS transm. 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48

INTERNAL SERIAL INPUT 2 INPUT SERIAL

1516 1718 1920

SERIAL INPUT 1 INPUT SERIAL SERIAL INPUT 3 3 INPUT SERIAL

Flachkabel

OPTICAL ACKN. OPTICAL

3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 35 39 43 47

LAMP TEST LAMP

192 HORN ACKN. HORN

Technical Data

SERIAL OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT SERIAL

SERIAL OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT SERIAL

2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 34 38 42 46 GROUPS) (FOR 1 OUTPUT SERIAL

Kompakt EDA 47 EDA Kompakt - 24VDC±25% + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 37 41 45

Power supply Consumptionof electronics the Inputs Outputs Installation depthPanel cut-outWeight : 75mm 137mmx : 185mm stress stress capacity of relay the outputsDegree of protectionon front-side : 50V/1A 144

ALARM GROUP PANEL AHD 406H 406Hkat-englisch.doc

- Microprocessor-controlled device for control desk installation - Registers 144 individual reports from i.a. up to three KOMPAKT EDA-47-systems, via three serial inputs - Forms 10 arbitrarily programmable groups; every individual report can activate up to two groups - Internal printer control - Prints 144 texts with 32 characters each with AHD 12 printer - Two serial outputs for addressing of cabin and mess room panels - Each group can be programmed to trigger either an alarm or a status message - Six additional sub group relays can be allocated to one or more of the ten groups. Its contacts (floating transfer contacts) are available at the 50-pole terminal block. - One horn and one collective alarm relay are available - Connected by ribbon cable and 50-pole terminal block - Integrated engineer calling system - Available with individual LED or illuminated, automatically dimmed text-field for dark environments - GL classification

1. General 3 2. Construction 3

3.0 Function 3 3.1 Data registration 3 3.2 Grouping 3 3.3 Alarms/messages 3 3.4 Acoustic acknowledgement 4 3.5. Optical acknowledgement 4 3.6 Multiple addressing of a group 5 3.7 Lamp test 5 3.8 Collective alarm relays and subgroup relays 5 3.9 Engineer call 5 3.10 System failure 5 3.11 Dimming of the display elements 5

Technical data 6 Terminal diagram 6 Dimensional drawing 6 Order-related technical specification 7 System-specific programming 8

2 1. General

AHD 406H is a group alarm and display unit for 10 groups mainly used on vessels (bridge). It has three serial inputs by which it can register 48 individual reports per channel, a total of 144 reports altogether. Each report can address between zero and two groups. Every group can be programmed to release either an alarm or a status message. Six subgroup relays with floating transfer contacts are available for control purposes. Each of these relays can be assigned (arbitrarily programmable) to the ten groups, insofar as these are designated as alarms. The unit has two serial outputs to address the engineer and messroom control panels. It has a further serial output to control a printer.

2. Assembly

AHD 406H consists of two electronic cards connected by stay-rods. They form a plug-in unit together with the front panel. This plug-in unit is located in a housing for switchboard mounting according to DIN 43700. Its front dimensions are 72mm x 144mm and the installation depth is 227mm. The delivery includes a 50- pole terminal block that can be mounted on a TS32 or TS35 mounting rail and a ribbon cable as plug-in connection between device and terminal block.

The front panel is available in two versions (see illustration on page 1 of this description): - with individual LEDs and slide-in text field for illuminated rooms - with surface LEDs and text field as film negative, e. g. for bridges on vessels

3.0 Functions

3.1 Data registration

AHD 406H registers the data via three serial inputs (optocoupler, floating input). The following devices are possible i.a.: - alarm and monitoring system KOMPAKT EDA 47 - data distributor AHD W - alarm and safety system AHD 414A

The device receives the data according to the following serial data protocol:

Start-bit (high), 48 data bits of which the high-bits can be grouped, 8 control bits for serial acknowledgement, 80 to 500 stop-bits (low). There are no start or stop bits during transmission. The data rate is 1200 baud.

It would be beyond the scope of this manual to go into further detail concerning the reasons for this unusual serial format. It is however possible to adapt the software if necessary.

3.2 Grouping

The device stores its operating system and system-specific data on an Eprom 27C64 or EEprom 28C64. If a print function necessitating additional storage space for the texts is required, an EPROM 27C256 is used.

Address fields for grouping, further definition of the groups and sub-group relays can be found on page 8 of this description (system-specific programming). The plug-in unit can be removed from the housing, following loosening of the housing-frame and the fixing screw to access the EPROM or EEPROM. The storage is located on the upper card and can be removed from the IC-socket for programming.

3.3 Alarms/Messages

Each group can be programmed to release an alarm or a status message. An alarm causes flashing of the corresponding measuring point. Simultaneously, the horn and collective alarm relay are activated and where programmed one of the six sub-group relays. A measuring point which is programmed to release a message is constantly illuminated. Relays are not influenced by status messages.

3 Example for serial data registration 406hie.mcd

Alarm- and monitoring-systemCompact EDA 47 Group panel AHD 406H

1 2 3 4 AHD 406H

POWER DIM

5 6 7 8 Group 9 10 11 12 1 2 13 14 15 16 3 17 18 19 20 4 21 22 23 24 5 25 26 27 28 6 29 30 31 32 7 33 34 35 36 8 37 38 39 40 9 41 42 43 44 10 45 46 47 48 Failure Data Transmission TEST

AHD 406H

INTERNAL

Ribbon cable Ribbon cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

+ - + - K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 HORN COLLECT. REPORT 6 subgroup relays arbitrarily free programm- 24VDC±25% able to the 10 groups displayed in the textfield. 24VDC±25% COLL. ALARM RELAY HORNRELAY SYSTEM FAILURE CALL ALL ENG SERIAL INPUT 1 SERIAL INPUT 2 SERIAL INPUT 3 SERIAL OUTPUT 1 SERIAL OUTPUT 2 PRINTER CONNECTION HORN ACKN. OPTIC.ACKN. SERIALOUTPUT 1 (FORGROUPS) SERIALOUTPUT 2 SERIALOUTPUT 3 TEST HORNACKN. SERIALINPUT 3 SERIALINPUT 1 SERIALINPUT 2 LAMP TEST OPTICALACKN.

Start bit 48 data bits corresponding to meas. points 8 control bits for 80 to 500 bit pause (high) 1 to 48 (high, if measuring point is active) serial acknowledgement (low) Connection to further devices tofurther Connection

Data rate is 1200 Baud. Up to three COMPACT EDA 47 can be connected to one group panel. These inputs are usually notneeded, are usually inputs These or serially doneis acknowledgement as panel. the infront keys over

3.4 Acoustic acknowledgement

The horn relay can be reset with a key in the front panel or via a corresponding input on the terminal block. The horn relay can furthermore be acknowledged serially. Where the group panel receives data from KOMPAKT EDA 47 or from data distributor AHD W, acknowledgement signals are transmitted serially from there, too.

3.5 Visual acknowledgement

A flashing measuring point changes to steady light by visual acknowledgement. This can also becarried out with a key in the front panel or an input on the terminal block. Serial visual acknowledgement is also possible by means of by KOMPAKT EDA 47 or data distributor AHD W.

4 3.6 Multiple group address

A group is usually a combination of several individual messages. In the event of an alarm, a group message that is already activated but also acknowledged, is reactivated so that an individual report will not block the remaining alarms of the same group.

3.7 Lamp test

The key for visual acknowledgement in the front panel of the device also functions as a lamp test. All measuring points are illuminated while it is pushed.

3.8 Collective alarm and subgroup relays

Every alarm also causes switching of the collective alarm relay. In the event of a second alarm, the relay switches into normal position (closed) for app. 2s and then opens again (collective alarm repetition). A subgroup relay can be assigned to every measuring point, insofar as it is programmed to release an alarm message. If several measuring points affect one relay, that relay can operate as first value indicator or, like the collective alarm relay, as new value indicator.

3.9 Engineer call

If an alarm is not acknowledged acoustically in the engine control room within 5 minutes (including serial alarms on the group panel), the relay CALL ALL ENG switches. It is led to the 50-pole terminal block as normally-closed-contact and reset after acknowledgement. Where chamber-/mess-room panels within the scope of a st.-by alarm system are connected to the device, the message will also be activated there serially.

3.10 System failure

AHD 406H has a relay that usually is normally closed. The contact that leads to the terminal block is then closed. In case of system failure or power failure the contact opens.

3.11 Dimming of display elements

The construction of the device with a text field illuminated by surface LEDs has a photo resistor by which the lucency of the LED is dimmed automatically, depending on the ambient brightness. The maximal dimming in darkness can also be adjusted with a potentiometer in the front panel. Glaring or reflection in the windowpanes is thus avoided.

5 406H-3e AHD 406H

Ribbon cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

+ - K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6

6 subgroup relays arbitrarily programmable to the 10 groups displayed in the text field. 24VDC±25% SERIAL OUTPUT 1 SERIAL OUTPUT2 PRINTER CONNECTION COLLECT. ALARM RELAY HORN RELAY SYSTEM FAILURE CALL ALL ENG SERIAL INPUT1 SERIAL INPUT2 SERIAL INPUT3 ENG-CALL ACKN. ENG-CALL ACKN. HORN ACKN. OPTIC. ENG ALL CALL Techncal data

Power supply : 24VDC +/-25% Power consumption of electronic : appr. 0.3A Loadability of relay contacts : 1A, 48V Perm. ambient temperature : 0-65 °C Perm. relative air humidity : 99% Degree of protection at front side : IP 20 (with front cap IP44) Panel cutout : 138mm x 68mm 236 Group - no. 227 72

AHD 406H

POWER DIM 1 2 3 4 5 6 144 7 8 9 10

TEST

50-pole ribbon cable Short description Over 3 serial inputs, the device can register up to 144 individual reports 150 from up to 3 COMPACT EDA 47. Every individual report can be assigned 0 9 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 44 46 48 50 aribtrarily to 0 to 2 groups. The groups can be defined as alarms ep de (flash, horn relay switches) or displays. Additionally, 6 subgroups are 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 43 45 47 49 available of which each can be assigned to any group displayed in the 75 front panel. If an alarm group is not acknowledged for more than 5 minutes, the relay CALL ALL ENG. switches. A storage area for the texts to be printed (144 measuring points with 32 characters each) is located in the EEprom (tear out insertion). Two serial outputs are available for addressing the chamber- and messroom-panels. Terminal block is mountable on rails TS 32 and TS 35

6 406hm-e.mcd K3 K5 Com-no. (Böning) 4- (Böning) Com-no. Date: ...... Date: K2 to thehere mentioned ts. K1 K4 K6 el AHD 406H AHD el GROUP RELAY DEFINITION RELAY GROUP First value indicator value First indicator value New Length of ribbon cable: ...... cable: ribbon of Length Client Shipyard Newbuilding

The assignment of the individual reports according groups has to be defined in the measuring point lis

(red, yellow or green) or yellow (red,

LED-Color

display (An) display

Group as alarm (Al) or (Al) alarm as Group

(1 possible from K1 to K6) to K1 from possible (1 Group relay Group Meas. point text point Meas. Group - no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Order-related technical specification for group pan group for specification technical Order-related

7 406hp-e.mcd SYSTEM-SPECIFIC PROGRAMMING Serial input 1Serial input 2 Serial input 3 Program groups as alarm or display 00 Alarm = 00 Display = 01 Eprom address address Eprom Group 1 1A00 2 1A00 Content report no. Individual Content Eprom address 1st address group Eprom Content Content Content 1st address group Eprom Content Individual report report no. Individual report no. Individual Eprom address 2nd group 2nd address Eprom 1st address group Eprom group 2nd address Eprom group 2nd address Eprom 3 1A00 11A00 1A30 11A60 1A90 1 1AC0 1AF0 4 1A00 21A01 1A31 21A61 1A91 2 1AC1 1AF1 5 1A00 31A02 1A32 31A62 1A92 3 1AC2 1AF2 6 1A00 41A03 1A33 41A63 1A93 4 1AC3 1AF3 7 1A00 51A04 1A34 51A64 1A94 5 1AC4 1AF4 8 1A00 61A05 1A35 61A65 1A95 6 1AC5 1AF5 9 1A00 71A06 1A36 71A66 1A96 7 1AC6 1AF6 10 1A00 81A07 1A37 81A67 1A97 8 1AC7 1AF7 91A08 1A38 91A68 1A98 9 1AC8 1AF8 Activation of the 101A09 1A39 101A69 1A99 10 1AC9 1AF9 serial inputs 111A0A 1A3A 111A6A 1A9A 11 1ACA 1AFA 121A0B 1A3B 121A6B 1A9B 12 1ACB 1AFB 131A0C 1A3C 131A6C 1A9C 13 1ACC 1AFC 141A0D 1A3D 141A6D 1A9D 14 1ACD 1AFD 151A0E 1A3E 151A6E 1A9E 15 1ACE 1AFE 161A0F 1A3F 161A6F 1A9F 16 1ACF 1AFF 171A10 1A40 171A70 1AA0 17 1AD0 1B00 181A11 1A41 181A71 1AA1 18 1AD1 1B01 serialinput Eprom address address Eprom 191A12 1A42 191A72 1AA2 19 1AD2 1B02 = 01 active, active = 00 not 1 1A00 201A13 1A43 201A73 1AA3 20 1AD3 1B03 2 1A00 211A14 1A44 211A74 1AA4 21 1AD4 1B04 3 1A00 221A15 1A45 221A75 1AA5 22 1AD5 1B05 231A16 1A46 231A76 1AA6 23 1AD6 1B06 Assignment of the 6 241A17 1A47 241A77 1AA7 24 1AD7 1B07 subgroup relays to 251A18 1A48 251A78 1AA8 25 1AD8 1B08 the 10 groups 261A19 1A49 261A79 1AA9 26 1AD9 1B09 (only alarms) 271A1A 1A4A 271A7A 1AAA 27 1ADA 1B0A 281A1B 1A4B 281A7B 1AAB 28 1ADB 1B0B 291A1C 1A4C 291A7C 1AAC 29 1ADC 1B0C Subgroup relays Subgroup possible) 06 to (01 Eprom address address Eprom 301A1D 1A4D 301A7D 1AAD 30 1ADD 1B0D Group 311A1E 1A4E 311A7E 1AAE 31 1ADE 1B0E 1 1BE6 321A1F 1A4F 321A7F 1AAF 32 1ADF 1B0F 2 1BE7 331A20 1A50 331A80 1AB0 33 1AE0 1B10 3 1BE8 341A21 1A51 341A81 1AB1 34 1AE1 1B11 4 1BE9 351A22 1A52 351A82 1AB2 35 1AE2 1B12 5 1BEA 361A23 1A53 361A83 1AB3 36 1AE3 1B13 6 1BEB 371A24 1A54 371A84 1AB4 37 1AE4 1B14 7 1BEC 381A25 1A55 381A85 1AB5 38 1AE5 1B15 8 1BED 391A26 1A56 391A86 1AB6 39 1AE6 1B16 9 1BEE 401A27 1A57 401A87 1AB7 40 1AE7 1B17 10 1BEF 411A28 1A58 411A88 1AB8 41 1AE8 1B18 421A29 1A59 421A89 1AB9 42 1AE9 1B19 Subgroup relay 431A2A 1A5A 431A8A 1ABA 43 1AEA 1B1A as first value 441A2B 1A5B 441A8B 1ABB 44 1AEB 1B1B or new value 451A2C 1A5C 451A8C 1ABC 45 1AEC 1B1C indicator 461A2D 1A5D 461A8D 1ABD 46 1AED 1B1D 471A2E 1A5E 471A8E 1ABE 47 1AEE 1B1D 481A2F 1A5F 481A8F 1ABF 48 1AEF 1B1F 00 = ind. = 00 value First = value 01 ind. New Eprom Eprom address The 48th individual report is set automatically in case of failure of the serial data Subgrouprelay and can thus be evaluated, too. 1 1BE0 Do not fill in addresses with content 00. 2 1BE1 3 1BE2 4 1BE3 5 1BE4 6 1BE5

8 CONTROL AND MONITORING UNIT AHD 406

- control and monitoring unit for flush mounting, front dimensions: 72mm x 144mm - eight binary measuring points; two measuring points can be used as both binary and analog - one input for alarm suppression - three group relays, one horn relay - one serial output - connection with 50-pole ribbon cable and terminal block (part of delivery) - text field can be exchanged easily - GL classification

AHD 406 is a microprocessor controlled device mainly Two versions of the device are deliverable: used for monitoring and controlling of engines. It meets - Front panel with individual LEDs the requirements of rough operating conditions on sea - Front panel with illuminated and automatically dimmed vessels such as high ambient temperatures, humidity, text fields as required e.g. on ship bridges. A film negative mechanical vibrations and peak voltage in the power text field is fixed on the illuminated area, so that only the supply. text is transparent. 2. Construction 5. Adjustment of analog inputs AHD 406 consists of two electronic cards connected by Where the customer requires alarm 9 and (or) 10 to be threaded pins. The cards and the front panel form a plug-in unit located in a housing for control desk activated with a DC current signal 4-20 mA (analog mode ), installation acc. DIN 43700. It consists of impact- the device will be equipped accordingly. The switching resistant and self-extinguishing plastic. points can be adjusted arbitrarily by means of spindle trimmers. The potentiometers are arranged on the lower The integrated circuits (IC) used on the electronic cards circuit board of the plug-in unit. They are labeled with are plugged onto sockets and can be exchanged without numbers according to their alarms 9/10. soldering. This makes service extremely easy and even a technical layperson will be capable of repairing a The following applies for both trimmer-potentiometers: defective device. switch to the right - switching point increases The plug-in unit can be removed after loosening of a switch to the left - switching point decreases captive screw. All inputs and outputs are led to a 50- pole plug acc. DIN 41651. A 50-pole terminal block and The following table serves for rough pre-adjustment of the ribbon cable for the connection between the device and switching points. Deviations are possible due to component transfer unit are part of the delivery. tolerances.

The system program containing information on Number of trimmer- computer reactions to external data is stored in an potentiometer Input signal Eprom type 27C64 or EEprom type 28C64. rotations to the right (mA) ------3. Function 0 3.8 2 4.1 4 5.0 The device starts monitoring upon connection with the 5 5.6 power supply. Should one of the 10 possible external 6 6.2 sensors react, the corresponding alarm is reported 7 6.9 optically by a flashing LED in the front panel and 8 7.9 acoustically by an external horn. Its delay times are 9 9.2 programmable. At the same time, up to three group 9.5 10.0 relays react activating alarm or control operations. 10 10.8 10.5 12.1 Function keys in the front panel 11 13.7 11.5 16.0 Optical acknowledgement: Flashing LEDs in 12 18.0 the front panel show steady light after pressing 12.5 20.0 this key. This function is enabled after the acoustic signal has been acknowledged.

Acoustic acknowledgement and lamp test: In the event of an alarm the horn can be deactivated by pressing this key. Otherwise the key enables the lamp test. Each function has TEST an output on the external transfer unit.

T Alarm test: The user can simulate the activation E of all alarms with this key. Delays and group S relays can thus be checked easily. T Acknowledged LEDs (steady light) go out when the corresponding channel no longer receives an alarm value. At the same time, the relevant group relays switch back to their normal status. 406AE.MCD Caution: Content 00 no suppression Model with illuminated and auto- 236 Content 00 AlarmContent 01 suppression, if Empty fields for storage addresses Measuring point no. matically dimmed textfield. Inhalt 00 NC (Ruhestr.)have the content "00". Content 01 Display Suppr. input activated 72 Here, a film negative is placed on 227 (terminal 27/28)Inhalt 01 NO (Arbeitsstr.) top of the illuminated area, so only red, yellow or green The group relays are addressed with the measuringoints p Model with single LED the text will be visible. if the storage addresses have the content 01. AHD 406 LED Display/ Alarm Input Group relays Delay AHD 406 POWER Color Alarmsuppression NC/NOK3 K2 K1 (Cont.+1s) dec DIM - Display - - 1F40 - - - - - 1F00- 03 0 Supervision On red 1FD1 1F51 01 1F41 1F31 1F21 1F11 1F0101 1 1 1F53 01 red 1FD2 1F52 01 1F42 1F32 1F22 1F12 1F02 2 2 01 red 1FD3 1F43 1F33 1F23 1F13 1F0301 3 3 red 1FD4 1F54 1F44 1F34 1F24 1F14 1F0401 4 4 red 1FD5 01 1F55 1F45 1F35 1F25 1F15 1F0510 5 5 red 1FD6 144 1F56 1F46 1F36 1F26 1F16 1F0610 red 1FD7 6 6 01 red 1FD8 1F57 1F47 1F37 1F27 1F17 1F07 7 7 01 red 1FD9 1F58 1F48 1F38 1F28 1F18 1F08 8 8 01 red 1FDA 1F59 1F49 1F39 1F29 1F19 1F09 9 9 1F5A 1F4A 1F3A 1F2A 1F1A 1F0A 10 10 T T

E E S S

T TEST T TEST Suppression input Storage addresses (E-Prom/EE-Prom) 50-pole ribbon cable 1F00 After deactivation of the input with terminals 27nd a K1 K2 K3 K4 28 and elapsing of the here entered time (0-99s), the usually suppressed measuring points are 150 activated. F1 F2 2x1A mt 0 9 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 44 468 504 ep Suppression1F40 input de Content 00 NC (quiescent current) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 43 45 4947 Content 01 NO (operating current) ribbon cable Terminal block is 75 mountable on rail TS 32 and TS 35 Relay 1F60 1 2 3 4 5 6 715 816 917 10 18 11 19 12 20 13 21 14 22 32 23 33 24 34 25 35 26 3641 27 3742 28 3843 29 3944 30 4045 31 46 47 48 49 50 K1 1F61

K2 Content 00 operating curr. relay Horn + - + - + - 1F62 Technical data K3 1F63 Content 01 quiescent curr. relay NC/NO K4 (-) Power supply : 24VDC +/-25% Power consumption of electronics : appr. 0.3A Relay 0(4)-20mA Loadability of relay contacts : 2A, 48V 1F64 Perm. ambient temperature : 0-65 °C K1 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 79/1010 8

24VDC±25% Perm. relative air humidity : 99% 1F65 K2 Content 00 new value indicator Degree of protection at front : IP 20 (withfront cap IP54) 1F66 Weight : app. 1.5 kg K3 Content 01 first value indicator

The insertion has to be torn out of the hous- Meas. point no. Alarm suppression Alarm Acknowledge horn Acknowledge optics Acknowledge Lamp test Lamp output Serial ing to reach the storage. For this purpose, test Alarm 406AE ORDER-RELATED the round head bolt with cross head (upper Device no. : ...... left side in the front plate) has to be loosened. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Length of ribbon cable : ......

Alarm and Safety System AHD 414A

Alarm System Safety System

- alarm and safety system for control desk mounting - 10 binary measuring points - inputs can be delayed up to 99s - 1 input for alarm suppression - override function - 3 arbitrarily programmable group relays and 1 horn relay - 24 pole plug terminal block - 1 serial input and 1 serial output - wire break monitoring and stop circuit (safety system) - acknowledgement is carried out on the front panel and externally via the terminal block - type approved by ABS, BV, GL, LR, RMS

1) Features

AHD 414A is a microprocessor controlled device for control desk installation with 10 binary inputs for alarm or status messages. It has the following features:

- utilized for alarm or safety system - individual solutions possible - small, robust design - 1 horn relay and 3 arbitrarily programmable group relays - high current relay outputs - serial interface - wire break monitoring of the inputs and group relay K1 (stop relay in the safety system) - low power consumption (app. 0.15A)

2) Assembly

AHD 414A consists of one electronic card with a processor system and all necessary peripheral components. The card is fixed to an aluminium front panel with 4 distance bolts. All ICs are plugged into sockets. The program is stored in an EPROM 27C64 or, if desired, in an EEPROM 28C64. The inputs and outputs connect to a 24 pole plug terminal block.

The unit is installed in a housing for control desk mounting acc. DIN 43700 with a front frame (dimensions: 144mm x 144mm, installation depth 53mm). A laser printed transparency on the front panel covered by a robust plastic foil is used for labelling. Both are fixed by the front frame.

3) Functions

3.1 Alarms/status messages

Each input is programmable to release either an alarm or a status message. The corresponding LED in the front panel flashes in the event of an alarm. Status messages are displayed by steady light. Alarms activate an internal buzzer and switch the horn relay. Alarms and status messages can be programmed to activate the group relays K1, K2 and/or K3.

3.2 Horn acknowledgement

The horn relay is acknowledged either by pushing the upper key on the front panel or externally by an input on the terminal block.

3.3 Optical acknowledgement

Flashing LEDs are permanently illuminated when the middle key in the front panel is pushed. There is furthermore an external input for optical acknowledgement via the terminal block.

3.4 Lamp Test

All measuring point LEDs are illuminated while the lamp test button is pushed.

2 Alarm and Safety System AHD 414A

3.5 Acknowledgement and resetting of alarms

As long as alarms are not acknowledged optically they are reported, irrespective of whether they are still present or not. The LEDs are not extinguished before the corresponding alarms are acknowledged optically and no longer active. Where the device is used as a safety system the RESET-key also has to be activated.

3.6 Group Relays

AHD 414A has 3 group relays which can be assigned to every alarm. It is also possible to assign several group relays to one alarm. The group relays can be programmed to indicate only the first or every new alarm value. They can furthermore be programmed to be normally closed or open. If the device is used as a safety system, the first group relay K1 always operates as normally open and first-value-indicator.

3.7 Wire Break Monitoring (safety system only)

The inputs and group relay K1 can be monitored to detect wire break. Therefore Z-diodes BZX 7V5 have to be installed parallel to the contacts. Wire break monitoring of the relay takes place by means of a low test current (app. 4mA) flowing through the coil, its interruption releasing an alarm. The lowermost LED is used as a wire break indicator. If only this lower LED flashes, the wire break report refers to group relay K1. In the event of further LEDs flashing, this refers to the corresponding input circuits. The flash phase is shifted by 180° to ensure a clear distinction between the actual alarms and the wire break report.

3.8 Alarm Blocking

AHD 414A has an input (measuring point 1) used for blocking/suppressing alarms. The upper LED is assigned to this input.

3.9 Override (ship has priority before engine)

If the device is used as safety system, relay K1 (stop relay) can be assigned to an override function. Every stop alarm can be programmed as inferior or superior to the override function. This normally affects all stop alarms except “overspeed”. Override functions as follows:

Where a stop criterion is activated for which the override function is programmed, relay K1 does not react if the override input is active. The engine therefore does not stop. In the event of the override input having been inactive when the alarm occurred, the stopping of the engine can be prevented by delayed activation of the override input (activated relay K1 switches off). The prerequisite for this is that the engine is still running at a speed higher or equal to idling speed. Should a stop alarm be active without stopping the engine, due to the active override input, this can be revised by deactivating “Override”. In this case the engine would stop belatedly. In the event of a stop criterion (e.g. overspeed) not assigned to the override function, the engine is always stopped.

3.10 Serial Communication

AHD 414A has a serial input that can only be used for customer-specific special functions. The following information is available at the serial output (1200 Baud):

Startbit (high), 12 bits corresponding to measuring points 1 to 11 (alarm system), 1 to 12 (safety system) from top to bottom (high, if measuring point is active, low if inactive), 3 bits corresponding to the group relays K1 to K3 (active group relay results in high-bit).

3 Alarm and Safety System AHD 414A

It is possible i.a., to transmit information to the alarm system DZA 02 or to the relay station AHD R101 via its serial interface and a data distributor AHD W (see last page of this documentation).

4) Labelling/Programming

The measuring point list and the programming list on pages 5 and/or 6 must be filled out by the customer depending on whether the device is used as alarm or safety system. Following this, the device is programmed accordingly. As mentioned in 2), a laser printed transparency is utilized for labelling the front panel. An AutoCad-file with the template for the transparency is provided upon request for labelling by the customer

All programmed settings can be changed by using a programming device for Eproms and/or Eeproms, which can be done by the user. The address contents and relevant functions can be found in the aforementioned measuring point and programming list.

4 Alarm and Safety System AHD 414A 414A-ALE.MCD HD 414A max 5 d. TTY, standard edition 1200 baud, :24VDC 25% ± or 12VDC :app. 0.15A :3A, but total of startbit (high) 11 data bits corresp. to meas. point 1 to 11,1 x low, group relays K1, K2 andK3, app. 20ms to100ms pause (low), :99% :138 mm x 138 mm :IP 54 :53 mm :0.5 Kg : 53

5A, 50VDC/AC

136 144 TECHNICALDATA Powersupply Consumptionof electronics Perm.load of relay contacts Serialinterface Perm.relative air humidity Panelcutout Protectionclass at front Installation depth Weight

". Please only make entries, if changes are require are changes if entries, make only ". Please

(E-Prom 27C64 or EE-Prom 28C64) EE-Prom or 27C64 (E-Prom Type-Chip TEST 144

e Meas.Point and Programming List for Alarm System A

t 5 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 2322 24

r hey have, as far as not filled out, the content "01 content the out, filled not as far as have, hey

e MeasuringPoint Text

r ALARMBLOCKING CANCELED

BÖNING

l AHD 414A

e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1

p LED color or green or green red, yellow red, - no=00 yes=01 Content"01" = Relay operates as first-value-indicator Content"00" = Relay operates as new-value-indicator

by meas. bymeas. 1 point Suppression 1F51

serial input serial

serial output serial

NO 01 = 24V NC00 = ackn. Optics ackn.

00". Exceptions are the addresses for the delays. T delays. the for addresses the are Exceptions 00". NC/NO Horn ackn. Input

1F40 (Rest/Operation) 1F65 1F66 Eprom- blocking alarm address K1 1F64 K2 K3 Relay 5 16 5 1817 20 19 23 22 21 24 cont. 01 cont. if NC/NO Group Relays Group meas. point no. point meas. switches switches switches if cont. 01 if cont. 01

K1 K2 K3 2 3 45 6 7 8 109 11 1

Cont."01" - rest current relay Cont."00" - operating curr. relay

horn K4

( - - ( )

K3 Delay K2 1F02 1F03 1F04 1F05 1F06 1F07 1F08 1F09 1F0A 1F01 1F00 EPROM Address

1F61 1F62 Eprom- K1

Empty fields for EPROM-addresses have the content " content the have EPROM-addresses for fields Empty address

Alarm=00 Display=01 24VDC, ± 25% ± 24VDC, K2 K3 K4 1F63 Alarm/ Display + - Relay K1 1F60 1Fd21Fd31Fd41Fd51Fd6 1F121Fd7 1F13 1F221Fd8 1F14 1F231Fd9 1F15 1F32 1F241FdA 1F16 1F33 1F25 1F17 1F42 1F34 1F26 1F18 1F43 1F35 1F27 1F19 1F44 1F36 1F52 1F28 1F1A 1F45 1F37 1F53 1F29 1F46 1F38 1F54 1F2A 1F47 1F39 1F55 1F3A 1F48 1F56 1F49 1F57 1F4A 1F58 1F59 1F5A 1Fd1 1F11 1F21 1F31 1F41 ------EPROMCont. EPROM EPROM EPROM EPROM EPROM Address(sec) Address Address Address Address Address 1 53 42 76 9108 13 12 11 1 14 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 Measuring PointNo.

5 Alarm and Safety System AHD 414A max 5 414asi5e.MCD 53

tem AHD414A

136 144 TTY, standard edition 1200baud, startbit (high) 12 databits corresp. to LED 1 to12 inthe front panel, group relays K1, K2 and K3, app. 20ms pause (low), 99% : 138 : mmx 138mm IP : 54 53 : mm 0.5 : Kg : 24VDC : 25%± or 12VDC app. : 0.15 A 3A, : but atotal of : d. d. 5A, 50VDC/AC R E S E T TEST ENGINE STOP

144 TECHNICAL DATA Powersupply Consumptionof electronics Perm. loadof relay contacts Serialinterface Perm. relativeair humidity Panelcut-out Protectionclass at front Installationdepth Weight

(E-Prom 27C64 or EE-Prom 28C64) EE-Prom or 27C64 (E-Prom Type-Chip ". Please only make entries, if changes are require are changes if entries, make only Please ". Measuring Measuring PointText ENGINE IN OPERATION OVERRIDE WIRE BREAK STOP CIRCUIT/ SENSOR CIRCUIT BÖNING AHD 414A 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 1 9 2 10 11 5 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Measuring Point and Programming List for Safety Sys LED Color green red, yellow greenor Rear View without Cover no=00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 Override hey have, as far as not filled out, the content "01 the content out, not filled as far as have, hey - 1EF1 1EF2 1EF3 1EF4 1EF5 1EF6 1EF7 1EF8 1EF9

EPROM yes=01 Address

pluggable terminal block

- - input serial

serial output serial

24V

ddress optics Ackn.

1FFB

- - supervision Wirebreak Ackn. horn Ackn. Engine in oper. in Engine

- no=00 no=00 Override yes=01 yes=01 Content"01" = Relay operates as first-value-indicator Content "00"= Relay operates asnew-value-indicator by meas. by 1 point Suppression - - - - 1F51 1FF1 5 5 1716 18 2019 21 23 22 24 NO =NO 01 NC= 00 NC/NO NC/NO Input 1F40 (Rest/Operation) 1F66 1F65 Eprom- address Meas.no.point

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1

K3 Relay K2 00". Exceptions are the addresses for the delays. T the delays. for addresses the are Exceptions 00".

Horn K4

( ( ) -

K3 K2

Group Group relays

Engine stop Engine

K1 switches switches switches 25% ± 24VDC, ifcont. 01 cont.01 if cont. 01 if K1 K2 K3 + - Cont."01" - quiesc. current relay Cont."00" - operating curr. relay Wirebreak supervision relay circuit K1 1 1 342 5 9 8 7 6 10 12 11 1413 1 ------1F1A 1F2A 1F3A 1F4A 1F5A 1FFA Delay 1F02 1F03 1F04 1F05 1F06 1F0A ------1F07 1F00 1F01 1F08 EPROM 1F09 Address 1F62 1F61 Eprom- address Display=01 Alarm=00 Symbol : View : K3 Alarm / Display Relay K2 1Fd2 1F12 1F22 1F32 1F42 1F52 1FF2 1Fd3 1F13 1F23 1F33 1F43 1F53 1FF3 1Fd4 1F14 1F24 1F34 1F44 1F54 1FF4 1Fd5 1F15 1F25 1F35 1F45 1F55 1FF5 1Fd6 1F16 1F26 1F36 1F46 1F56 1FF6 1FdA 1Fd7 1F17 1F27 1F37 1F47 1F57 1FF7 - - - - 1Fd1 1F11 1F21 1F31 1F41 1Fd8 1F18 1F28 1F38 1F48 1F58 1FF8 1Fd9 1F19 1F29 1F39 1F49 1F59 1FF9 EPROM Cont. EPROM EPROM EPROM EPROM EPROM EPROM Address(sec) Address Address Address Address Address A For wire break monitoring, Z-diodes BZX7V5/1.3W are (part of delivery). installed parallel to the contacts Empty fields for EPROM-addresses have the content " content the have EPROM-addresses for fields Empty 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 1 9 2 10 11 Measuring no. point

6 Alarm and Safety System AHD 414A r101pe.mcd m and dd6.doc 31 28 32 29 33 30 34 21 27 serial output that transmits, that output serial 35 20 26 ized. On request, we can offer can we request, On ized. nts 1 to 12 to relays 1 to 12, and 12, to 1 relays to 12 to 1 nts 36 19 25 y station contains a microprocessor microprocessor a contains ystation 37 18 24 listed below. With the relay station, relay the With below. listed 38 17 23 safetysystem AHD414A withparallel output. 39 16 22 40 15 41 14 42 13 Serialtransmission ofstatus reportsfrom the alar 43 12 44 11 45 10 9 46 8 47 k1 k2 k3 k4 k5 k6 k7 Relay Station Relay R101 AHDStation 7 48

49 serial in 2 in serial 6 50 k15 k14 k13 k12 k11 k10 k9 k8

5 51 serial in 1 in serial 4

AHD R101 AHD 24VDC 2 + 1 the relevant software adjustments. software relevant the in cycles of less than 0.3s, the 15 status reports reports status 15 the 0.3s, than less of cycles in 15. to 1 relays to assigned be can they poi measuring assign to is application standard One rela the As 15. to 13 relays to 3 to 1 relays group real be can assignment arbitrary any almost system, This example shows safety system AHD 414A. It has a has It 414A. AHD system safety shows example This

2 wires, up to 1000 m transmission range transmission m 1000 to up 2 wires,

Serial Input Serial

Serial Output Serial

24V

Ackn. Optics Ackn.

Ackn. Horn Ackn.

Engine in Operation in Engine Override R E S E T TEST 5 16 17 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 16 5 serial transmission serial NC/NO ENGINE STOP Meas.Point No.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 1 10 7 9 11 246 3 5

Horn K4 K3

( - ) ( -

Engine stop Engine ENGINE IN OPERATION K1 OVERRIDE WIRE BREAK STOP CIRCUIT/ SENSOR CIRCUIT

BÖNING AHD 414A 25% ± 24VDC, + - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 No. Meas. Point

Alarm System AHD 530 with Serial Data Input

- desk installation device AHD 530 - 72 mm x 144mm x 38mm installation depth - nine illuminated and automatically dimmed measuring points - activated serially by Binary Station PS 47-1-15 or Analog Data Station AHD 903-15 - every message can be programmed as alarm or display - each message can block every other message - protection class IP 66 on the front panel

3 wires including power supply

to next AHD 530 if available

- Binary Data Station PS 47-1-12 with 12 optocoupler inputs for rail mounting (TS 32 or 35) - inputs 1 to 9 correspond to text fields 1 to 9 of AHD 530 - converts contacts or other switches into a serial output signal, one or more AHD 530 are connected by 3 wires incl. power supply

Development, manufacturing, service for shipping and industry Böning Automationstechnologie GmbH & Co. KG • Am Steenöver 4 • D-27777 Ganderkesee Phone: +49(0)4221 9475-0 • Fax: +49(0)4221 9475-22 • Internet: www.boening.com • E-Mail: [email protected] 530messe.mcd Measuring point list is to be filled out by custome by filled out be to is list point Measuring Meas. Color of illu- Switch-on Switch-off Suppression (blocking) Measuring point text Opener Shutter Display Alarm point no. minated field delay (1 - 60s) delay (1 - 60s) by input

8 r.

9 General The alarm system consists of a binary data station PS 47-1-12 and one or more alarm systems AHD 530. The data station has 12 optocoupler inputs that are transformed into a serial output signal. The data are transferred to the alarm systems by a single wire. They assign the inputs 1 to 9 to the alarms 1 to 9.

Each measuring point can be programmed to handle either NC or NO contacts and can also have a switch-on and/or switch-off delay (1 to 60s) and furthermore an alarm or message function. Every input can moreover be blocked (activated) by any other input.

Data Station PS 47-1-12 The device is constructed for installation in a housing (e.g. terminal box) and is mounted on a rail (TS 32 or TS 35). The terminal blocks are pluggable. PS 47-1-12 transforms 12 inputs into a serial output signal. Thus minimising the required wiring.

Alarm System AHD 530 The device for control desk mounting is fitted with a gasket for waterproofing. The front panel is protected by seawater and UV light resistant foil. Both protective measures accord to protection class IP 66 for the front panel. The device can thus be used indoors and outdoors. The message texts are displayed on a film negative which is fixed behind the foil. Each message is illuminated in a field with the dimensions of 38mm X 10mm when activated. The fields are either red, yellow or green. The text fields are dimmed automatically by means of a photo resistor in the front panel.

Alarms An alarm is signalled acoustically by an integrated buzzer and optically by flashing of the relevant message.

Messages A new message does not activate the buzzer, but displays steady light immediately without prior acknowledgement.

Acoustic and optic acknowledgement of alarms An alarm is acknowledged acoustically by pushing the key. After the key is released and pushed again the message is acknowledged optically and appears as steady light. As soon as the cause of the alarm has been removed the message illumination is turned off.

Lamp test Where no alarm is activated the key has the function „lamp test“. As long as it is pushed, all message fields are illuminated.

The device is programmed ex works according to the specifications in the measuring point list. The relevant form can be found on the last page of this documentation. Possible changes such as during commissioning, still necessitate exchange of the Eprom. Menu-controlled programming via notebook is projected. 530-5-e.mcd Message no. 72 38 (install. depth) 4 62 3 .5 BÖNING AHD 530

58 1 Coolant level terminal block too low (4-pole) Coolant temp. 2 too high Lub. oil pressure 3 too low

4 Overspeed circuit board Failure panel cut-out 5 coolant pump 144 130 Gear oil temp. 134 6 too high Gear oil pressure 7 too low Battery 8 charge control 9 System failure

Power on

System failure TEST

12 3 4 gasket + - front panel covered with foil TECHNICAL DATA AHD 530 Power supply: 24VDC 24VDC±25% Power consumption: 0.2A Inputs: 1 x serial Outputs: 1 x serial Parallel-Serial Converter Baudrate: 1200 PS 47-1-12 Protection class: IP 66 (at front side) 2 x 0.63 Amtr Weight: 0.2kg

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

+ - TECHNICAL DATA PS 47-1-12 Power supply: 24VDC Power consumption: 0.2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 vacant inputs serial data transfer data serial for optional Inputs: 12 x binary applications Outputs: 1 x serial 24VDC±25% Baudrate: 1200

Message no. : Protection class: IP 00 Weight: 0.2kg

111 Parallel-Serial Converter PS 47-1-12 (top view)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 92 55

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 26 24 25 23 22 21 20 VIEW "A" pluggable terminal blocks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

mountable on TS 32 and TS 35

VIEW "A" 524-903e Decentralized data registration with AHD 903-15

th and display on LCD-Monitor AHD 524 5 p 7 de ion lat tal 192 ins

AHD 524 PANEL 3: Tank Content Displays (1) lube oil tank (5) fuel tank bilge (2) CW-trim tank (6) day tank Bb (3) fresh water tank (7) day tank Stb (4) waste tank (8) engine room bilge (cm) 16.6 85.7 39.1 26.8 347 15.4 42.2 12.6 voll Al...... + Al...... + Al...... + Al...... + Al...... + Al...... + Al...... + 3/4 Al...... + 144 1/2

1/4 - device for control desk installation Al...... - Al...... - Al...... - Al...... - Al...... - Al...... - - display and alarm system Al...... - Al...... - leer - display as bar chart or tabular (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

- LCD-monitor 116 mm x 88 mm with auto- ON INFO + - DIM CONTRAST matically dimmed background illumination - resolution 320 x 240 pixels - several pages can be called up by keystroke

- programming over plug-in keyboard keys for - serial interfaces: current loop to substations paging

AHD 903-15, 2 X RS232 for printer and 2 4 6 8 1012 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 2 4 6 8 1012 14 16 1820 PC-connection - Alarm panel can be called up with the INFO-key 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1517 19 21 23 25 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1517 19 - integrated clock 26-pole 20-pole - further displays can be connection in slave-function over only one wire - type approved by ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LR terminal block

4-wire bus-cable incl. power supply 2 x RS232C (PC, printer) Transfer Unit, 40-pole Analog Data Station AHD 903-15 Relay Unit AHD 903R (optional) 113 146 68

ribbon cable 5 ribbon cable 11 ep de Every input can be assigned to one of the 4 group relays. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 4 6 8 10 12 1416 1820 22 24 2628 30 32 3436 38 40 58 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 2729 31 33 3537 39 56 56

- compact, addressable system for decentralized data registration by bus-coupling - 15 inputs, mixed on request, 0(4)-20mA, 0(2)-10V, PT100, PT1000, binary - precision measuring with reference compensation, filter and 12-bit-transformer-resolution - serial output for direct connection with the alarm system EDA-47 - exhaust gas average value control, tank content measurement

n -stations n - relay-module can be connected - type approved by ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 4 6 8 10 12 1416 1820 22 24 2628 30 32 3436 38 40 58 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 2729 31 33 3537 39 56 56

Böning GmbH - Automationstechnik Am Steenöver 4, D27777 Ganderkesee, Tel. (49) 04221-9475-0, Fax. -21 oder 22 Development, manufacturing,E-Mail [email protected] for shipping and industry Böning Automationstechnologie GmbH & Co. KG • Am Steenöver 4 • D-27777 Ganderkesee Entwicklung - Fertigung - Service für Schifffahrt und Industrie AHD 903 and LCD Display AHD 524 englisc Phone: +49(0)4221 9475-0 • Fax: +49(0)4221 9475-22 • Internet: www.boening.com • E-Mail: [email protected] 1 CONTENTS

Descriptions

Analog Data Station AHD 903-15

General 3 Construction of device 3 Data registration 4 Dimensional drawing 5 Terminal diagram 5 Technical Data AHD 903-15 5 Technical Data AHD 903R 5

LCD-Display AHD 524

General 6 Construction of device 6 Function 6 Interfaces 7 Dimensional drawing 8 Technical data 8 Terminal diagram 9

Configurations

Configuration of the analog data station AHD 903-15 10 and of the display AHD 524

Applications

Exhaust gas average value monitoring for diesel engines 11 Tank level measurement 12 15 measuring transducers with data station AHD 903-15 and 13 relay unit AHD R101 Examples for page design of the display (masks) 14

2 Analog data station AHD 903-15

1. General

AHD 903-15 is a microprocessor controlled device that is mainly used for decentralized data registration. It is possible in principle, to connect any number of locally separated data stations (via a 4 wire bus, incl. power supply) and to call them up on the display AHD 524. The following problems can be solved by means of a variety of software solutions:

- general analog and binary data collection and alarm activation - exhaust gas average value monitoring for diesel engines - tank level measurement of different shaped tanks - earth-fault monitoring e.g. of electric motors

2. Assembly of device

AHD 903-15 consists of an electronic card housed in a polymer case. It is connected to a 40- pole terminal block via a ribbon cable for the connection of all inputs and outputs and the power supply.

The device was subjected to a vibration test of 4g according to German Lloyd and is therefore classified for direct installation into terminal boxes of diesel engines.

3 3. Data registration

Up to 15 sensors can be connected single-pole or bipolar to an analog data station. The recorded measuring values are standardized internally, converted and made available for the display unit AHD 524 as numeric values. In addition, limiting values can be programmed. If the measured value lies outside of this range, the corresponding alarm is released. All alarms are available at a separate serial data output (terminal 4). If the system is connected to display unit AHD 524, the display receives the commands for data check or the configuration parameters by means of a bidirectional bus. Therefore data can be retrieved from multiple data stations by using different addresses. The data are returned to the display unit AHD 524 via the same bus.

In addition to the internal monitoring the microprocessor controlled system contains a special non-volatile memory module for configuration data storage (limiting values, input mode, range limits, etc.). The measuring value registration is carried out by a 12-bit A/D converter. Integrated reference compensation, as well as signal filtration at the input enable precise measuring results.

The following input values can be processed:

- 0...10V/1...10V - 0...20mA/4...20mA - PT100 - PT1000 - binary values

Others upon request.

4 DIMENSIONAL DRAWING 903-1-b.mcd

40-pole terminal block Analog data station AHD 903-15 Relay unit AHD 903R (optional) 113 146 68

Ribbon cable Ribbon cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 1820 22 24 2628 30 32 3436 38 40 58 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 1921 23 25 2729 31 33 3537 39 56 56

mountable on rail TS 32 and TS 35

Plug-in connection with strain relief, acc. to DIN 41651

Ribbon cable 78 78 115 Type AHD 903-15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 Power supply 24VDC Device No. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 System address

TERMINAL DIAGRAM

Ribbon cable

AHD 903-15

2 x 0.63Amtr 2 x AHD 903R

K1 K2 K3 K4

Flachbandkabel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 + - Input no.

24VDC±25% serial transmission to display AHD 524

serial reception from display AHD 524

serial data output (only limiting values) TECHNICAL DATA AHD 903-15 TECHNICAL DATA AHD 903R Power supply : 24VDC ± 25% Number of relays : 4 Power consumpt. of electronics : app. 0.15 A Permissible load of relays : 1 A Number of inputs : 15 Permissible voltage of relays : 50VDC C Type of input : Pt100, Pt1000, 0(4)-20mA, 0(1)-10V Permissible rel. air humidity : 99% Input resolution : 12 bits Protection class : IP 00 Permissible rel. air humidity : 99% Weight : 01 Kg Protection class : IP 00 Weight : 0.5 Kg

5 LCD-Display AHD 524

1. General

AHD 524 is a microprocessor controlled device for displaying measuring values and alarms. The display depicts them in tabular or graphic form and allows an arbitrary number of pages. In many cases the instrument can be a favorable alternative to PC-solutions. It is possible to connect an arbitrary number of further displays (bridge, chambers, mess, ....) by means of a one wire connection plus power supply. The operation of the individual devices is independent of each other.

2. Device assembly

AHD 524 is a device for dashboard installation with front dimensions 192mm x 144mm and an installation depth of 75mm. It essentially consists of 2 electronic cards. The display is attached to one card fastened to the front panel and the other is fastened to the inside of the rear panel. Both cards are interconnected.

The aluminium panel front is additionally protected by a transparent polymer panel. It is operated by buttons installed in the front panel next to the photo-electric cell for automatic dimming of the LCD. The display illumination is adapted to the ambient brightness by means of additional electronic circuitry.

A 26-pole terminal block for electrical wiring is mounted on rail TS32 or TS35. It is connected to the display unit via a ribbon cable. Where the RS232C-interface is used, an additional 20- pole terminal block is required.

3. Function

The versatile display unit software sequentially queries all AHD 903-15 data stations connected to the communication bus which is carried out by using different addresses. The measured values are checked (check sum test) and displayed as bar charts or as numerical values in tabular form. Simultaneously, additional measuring point information such as measuring point text, limiting values and the unit of the measured value is shown.

The data received from AHD 903-15 data stations is distributed to one or more displays depending on the number of measuring points. Buttons on the front panel enable the user to browse through the pages. A maximum of 18 measuring values can be displayed on one page using the tabular mode, while the graphical mode can display a maximum of 8 measuring values including additional information. Tabular and graphic displays can be combined arbitrarily in one system.

The system has an additional memory component accessible from the rear, which permanently stores all configuration data such as AHD 903-15 limiting values, input modes, range limits etc. The actual LCD display window measures 116x88 mm and has a resolution of 320x240 pixels. The height of the characters is > 3mm. Modern STN - technology combined with the aforementioned automatically dimmed background illumination enables high contrast and a good readability.

6 4. Interfaces

Apart from the bidirectional BUS-interface (current loop) for communication with AHD 903-15 data stations, there is an RS232-interface for connection of a serial printer as well as a vacant optional RS232-interface for data coupling with a PC.

There are 7 additional serial inputs and outputs using the same hardware as the interface for communication with the data stations.

7 50 524-1c-e.mcd 53deep 60 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1618 20 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

Optional (only if RS232C- if (only Optional used) are interfaces 50 : appr.: 0.5 A 8 :x bi-directional (TTY-currentloop) 2 x RS232C (optional) 99%: Ip: 54at front-side max.: 8mm 1.2: kg : 24VDC ± 25%24VDC: ± : 185mm: x 137mm 53 deep 53 75 20-pole ribbon cable ribbon 20-pole 26-pole ribbon cable ribbon 26-pole 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 2325 TECHNICAL DATA Power supply Power cons.of electronics In-/outputs Perm. rel. air humidity Protection class Perm. thickness deskof panel Weight Panelcut-out 74 ' Ü ? # > ß N U G ESC PAUSE DRUCK desk panel, max.8 thick . \ : / * - < Ö _ + F6 T F F12 M $ Ä L F5 6 3 9 S Z E F11 Bild Bild NUM ALT Enter ' § % 8 5 2 F4 K F10 R Y D Entf. 35 = ! 1 4 0 J 7 F9 F3 Q X Einf. C Pos 1 Ende ; , " ) I F2 P B Strg Funct front-cap with O-ring gasket O-ring with front-cap ` (interchangeable against normal frame; normal against (interchangeable 144mm) x 192mm are dimensions front then, ( 9 F1 F7 F8 VW H A O SPACE keyboard for programming of the display of the programming for keyboard 903-15 AHD substations the and (pluggable) 5-pole DIN plug-in connection plug-in DIN 5-pole hinge photo resistor photo AHD 524 AHD CONTRAST Al...... + Al...... - DIM 27C256 Al...... - Al...... + 28C256 Al...... - Al...... + (6) (7) (8) (8) (7) (6) 15.4 42.2 12.6 (6) Day tank Pt. tank (6) Day Stb. tank (7) Day bilge room (8) Engine (5) Fuel tank bilge tank Fuel (5) Al...... - Al...... + 194 - Al...... - Al...... + Rear View Rear Dimensional Drawing Dimensional Al...... - Al...... + + Al...... - Al...... + (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1) INFO Al...... - Al...... + PANEL 3: Tank Content Displays Content Tank 3: PANEL (cm) 16.6 85.7 39.1 26.8 347

(2) CW trim tank trim CW (2) tank water Fresh (3) tank water Black (4) full 3/4 1/2 1/4 empty (1) Lub. oil oil tank (1) Lub.

ON 146

8 Terminal Diagram 524-3ae.mcd CTSA CTSB TXA RXA TXB RXB RTSA RTSB 8 similar inputs 8 similar outputs

ribbon cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 20-pole transfer station optional (only in case interfaces 26-pole transfer station + - RS232C are used) 24VDC±25% serial transmission to analog station AHD 903-15, terminal 7

serial reception from analog station AHD 903-15, terminal 8

9 Configuration of AHD 903-15 analog data station and AHD 524 display

The complete system is programmed by means of a foil-keypad that can be connected to the display unit. The integrated configuration software is menu controlled and enables the direct setup of all important parameters on the LCD display without additional auxiliary tools. Simple and fast adjustment on site is therefore guaranteed.

The ex-works condition accords to customer specifications. This applies in particular to the masks for individual pages. The attached measuring point list is the basis for programming the analog data stations.

Exh. gas contr. failure (NC) failure contr. gas Exh. Sensor failure/ Sensor

elevant 524-2-E.MCD

Cylinder temp. max (NO) max temp. Cylinder

After turbo (NO) (NO) turbo After

AHD 903R Exh. gas average value alarm (NO) alarm value average gas Exh. K1 K2 K3 K4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Ribbon cable SYSTEM 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 i-directional 2-wired ring line that can that line ring 2-wired i-directional or failure isreported and then filtered out the of ble overthe displayAHD 524.For this purpose, AHD903V. It amplifies the thermo-voltages logstations AHD 903-15. For alarming, data the t100-temperature-compensation.Access a to ystem. h the h display overa DIN-plug-in-connection. The locking rangeand the "trumpet shape" of the exhaus Pt 100 internal ambient temp.-compensation Additionally, relayoutputs are available forthe r analog substation (AHD903-15) and processed by a Ribbon cable 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 31 32

Analog Data Station AHD 903-15 24VDC±25% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 + - The communication with the display is done over a b a over done is display the with communication The Thethermocouples are connected with the amplifier are put out seriallyover terminal4, over1 wire. BRIEFDESCRIPTION OF THE EXHAUST GAS AVERAGE VALUE specialsoftware. Thissoftware also contains theP alsobe connected (terminals7and 8) with other ana factors,which are eventually needed for a safetys comfortablemenu-program on the substation is possi thereis keyboard a available thatis connected wit averagevalue calculation. limitingvalues after turbo, max. cylinder temp., b gasaverage valuecontrol can be programmed. Asens by factor100.The amplified signals are led to an 5 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 ' > Ü ß N U G ESC PAUSE DRUCK . \ : /? - < * _ Ö + # F6 T F F12 M $ Ä F5 6 3 L 9 S E Z F11 Bild Bild NUM ALT Enter 16-pole ribbon cable 16-poleribbon ' § % 8 5 2 F4 K F10 R Y D Entf. ! = 1 7 4 0 J F3 Q X C Einf. Pos 1 Pos Ende ; , ) " I P B Strg Funct ` ( F1 F2 F7 F8 F9 VW A H O SPACE 5-pole DIN plug-in connection plug-in DIN 5-pole NiCrNi Keypad with direct access the access to direct withKeypad substations. analog AHD 903 V 903 AHD AMPLIFIER FOR AMPLIFIER 12 12 THERMOELEMENTS AMPLIFICATION FACTOR : 100 : FACTOR AMPLIFICATION AHD 524 AHD

CONTRAST 24VDC±25%

+ - 24VDC±25%

+ - DIM after turbo after IS MAX Ribbon cable 500 0 445 500 445 26-pole ribbon cable ribbon 26-pole 35 463 35 463 35 260 420 260 30 460 40 460 30 35 465 35 37 463 33 38 462 32 35 465 35 35 465 35 35 465 35 32 462 38 462 32

5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 8

5 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 25 26

7 6 -

Exhaust GasAverage Value Control

5 4

2 1 INFO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 14 1 PANEL 4: U MIN BÖNING AFTER TURBO °C °C TURBO AFTER BEFORE TURBO °C °C TURBO BEFORE CYLINDER 2 °C °C 2 CYLINDER °C 3 CYLINDER °C 4 CYLINDER °C 5 CYLINDER °C 6 CYLINDER °C 7 CYLINDER °C 8 CYLINDER CYLINDER 1 °C °C 1 CYLINDER VALUE AVERAGE TEMP. CYLINDER MAX 20 RANGE BLOCKING ON ING.-BÜRO CYL. NO. CYL.

11 TANK CONTENT MEASURING AND DISPLAY SYSTEM WITH ALAR MING 524-5a.mcd

MASTER SLAVE Brief description 903524a.doc Display pages can be called up by paging with the Display pages can be called up by paging with the In the displayed example, a total of 30 tanks are e valuated over 2 analog data stations. The LCD-display; graphic-compliant, + and - keys or the info-key. + and - keys or the info-key. stations can be placed locally separated, which mea ns at convenient locations, in order to with autom. dimmed background minimize wiring. Two AHD 524 displays are used her for display of the tank contents. The illumination, 45 characters per line master-display communicates with the substations, w hile the slave-display remains passive. BÖNING AHD 524 and 20 lines, various pages can be BÖNING AHD 524 For this reason, only one wire is required between the two devices, which makes installation called up with keys, communicates easy and economic. Physically, both devices are the same and can be exchanged against each PANEL 3: Tank content display 1 PANEL 3: Tank content display 1 (1) Bottom tank 1 (5) Trim tank 1 with the analog data stations AHD (1) Bottom tank 1 (5) Trim tank 1 other. The number of slave-displays in one system i s not limited (e.g. bridge, eng.-chambers, (2) Bottom tank 2 (6) Trim tank 2 903-15, connection with PC and (2) Bottom tank 2 (6) Trim tank 2 mess-room,...). The devices can be operated indepen dent of each other. Of course, use of the (3) Side tank 1 (7) Trim tank 3 (3) Side tank 1 (7) Trim tank 3 (4) Side tank 2 (8) Trim tank 4 printer possible, integrated clock. (4) Side tank 2 (8) Trim tank 4 slave-display is not required as far as the system' s function is concerned. It is only supposed to (cm) 98.6 110 195 215 18 7 166 108 122 (cm) 98.6 110 195 215 18 7 166 108 122 demonstrate a possibility. Data entry is done menu- guided, via a pluggable keyboard (TYPE full full

Al...... + Al...... + Al...... +Al...... + Al...... +Al...... + Al...... + Al...... + Al...... +Al...... + Al...... +Al...... + PC-Mini 5). Input via PC is presently being develop ped.

3/4 3/4 5-pole DIN plug-in connection In this example, all sensors have an output voltage of 4-20mA, but it is just as well possible to 1/2 1/2 process voltage signals, e.g. 0(2)-10V, resistors o r signals (also non-linear ones).

1/4 Al...... - Al...... - 1/4 Al...... - Al...... -

empty empty Measuring value evaluation is done with a resolutio n of 12 bits. For a sensor-signal of 4-20mA (1) (2) (3) (4 ) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) (2) (3) (4 ) (5) (6) (7) (8) this results in an accuracy of appr. 0.5 %, includi ng consideration of internal tolerances. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 DRUCK A B C D E F G

F7 F8 F9F10 F11 F12 PAUSE ON INFO + - DIM CONTRAST H I J K L M N ON INFO + - DIM CONTRAST ( ) = % Ä ÖÜ OQP R S T U The tank content is shown graphically as bar charts and additionally as numeric value above the ` " ! § $ /? VW X Y Z \ ß bars. Units (cm, kg, l, t, ...) and names of the ta nks can be arbitrarily chosen by the user. Thus, ; 7 8 9 * ' , Pos 1 Bild + # _ > 8 tanks can be displayed on one page. The other pag es can be called up by paging with the SPACE 4 5 6 - < : + and - keys. Strg 1 2 3 ESC Ende Bild .

Funct 0 ' NUM ALT Enter 8 similar Einf. Entf. 8 similar inputs 8 similar inputs 8 similar The tanks may have any desired shape. Due to a spec ial software, each tank can be subdivided out- PC-Mini 5 keypad with helix cable for out- into up to 26 level segments, i. e. the parameters are entered at the relevant level segments and puts data entry (alternatively via PC/ puts the program independently linearizes between the in dividual "slices". The relevant level segment notebook) is not predetermined but can be arbitrarily defined according to the user's requirements.

Placing of the tanks on the display ribbon cable ribbon cable If nothing else is agreed upon, the tanks of inputs 1 to 8 of data station U1 are displayed on page one (T1). They correspond to bars 1 to 8 from left to right. The next 7, i. e. inputs 9 to 15, are displayed on the second page (T2). The space for th e 8th bar remains empty. Similarly, data station U2 is displayed on pages 3 (T3) and 4 (T4). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 115 16 12 17 13 18 14 19 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 115 16 12 17 13 18 14 19 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Alarms For each tank, two arbitrarily programmable limitin g values can be predetermined. They are marked + - + - graphically. + or - indicate if it is a max. or min . limiting value. When a limiting value is reached, the horn relay activates after the programmed delay time (0 to 999 s). At the same time, the normally activated collective alarm relay releases. In case it had already released, because of one or more upcoming alarms, it activates again for appr. 3s an d then releases again (collective alarm repetition)

ALARM PANEL: Date Time T no. 24VDC±25% 24VDC±25% A flashing cross for an optically unack- * Bottom tank 2 02.06 12:45 3 nowledged alarm and a non-flashing Fuel tank Pt. 01.06 08:25 2 checkmark after it has been optically Thisbridge "tells" the device that itis a Slaveand no Master. alarm (NC) Collective alarm (NC) Collective Horn (NO) Horn (NO) Ackn. horn Ackn. horn Ackn. optics Ackn. optics acknowledged. Connection of further slave-devices possible Analog data stations AHD 903-15 for connection of 15 tank sensors each ALARM PANEL

U1 AHD 903-15 U2 AHD 903-15 The displayed switches are designed as pluggable bridges The displayed switches are designed as pluggable bridges and are located on the printed circuit board of the 40-pole and are located on the printed circuit board of the 40-pole Shift [+] [-] Back [Info] 12 : 47 : 03 terminal block. They are preset factory-made according to terminal block. They are preset factory-made according to Also, an alarm causes the display to automatically switch over to the alarm panel. Here, all actual the marked positions. the marked positions. alarms are indicated including text, date and time in the chronological order of their occurrence. + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - The latest alarm is displayed in the first line, th e oldes in the last line. With the INFO-key, the us er can backspace and manually call up the alarm panel at any time.

Acknowledgement The device has one input each for acoustic and opti c acknowledgment. After acoustic acknowledgement, the horn relay releases. Optically unack nowledged alarms are indicated by a flashing Flachkabel ribbon cable star on the left side of the measuring point text. After optic acknowledgement, instead of the flashin g star, a non-flashing checkmark is shown. Once the a larm criteria is no longer existing, it will be deleted in the alarm panel after elapsing of the pr ogrammed switch-off delay time (0 to 999s). This only applies for alarms that have previously b een optically acknowledged. The order to first acknowledge acoustically and then optically must be followed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 510 16 11 17 12 18 13 19 14 20 1 21 2227 23 28 24 29 25 30 26 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 138 239 340 4 5 6 7 8 9 510 16 11 17 12 18 13 19 14 20 1 21 2227 23 28 24 29 25 30 26 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Options + - + - AHD 903R is a small module with 4 group relays. It can be connected with a data station AHD 903- 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15. One of the four group relays can be assigned to the limiting values of each of the 15 inputs. P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P The relays can operate as first- or new-value-indic ator. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 AHD R101 is a relay unit with 15 relays that are le d onto terminal blocks over 1 floating two-way 24VDC±25% 24VDC±25% contact each. It can be serially connected to a dat a station AHD 903-15 over only one wire. Thus,12 Connection of further data stations possible it is possible to assign the limiting values of eac h input of AHD 903-15 to one relay. . re). r, - re ni- eed cti- red h ah signed l not l the r101g-e.mcd 31 28 32 29 dd1.doc 33 30 34 21 27 35 20 26 36 19 25 37 18 24 38 17 23 39 16 22 40 15 alues with parallel output parallel with alues 41 14 42 13 43 12 44 11 to input 1 (1,5bar). A max.-limiting value, that is that max.-limiting value, A (1,5bar). 1 input to 2.input to assigned is speed, run idle the as same sp the Solong as 2. inputas by blocked is 1 Input wil pressure oil the reached, not is value limiting Only 8s dropped. remains Relay k1 monitored. be isa k2 relay speed, run idlethe of reaching after to ba 1.5 down goes pressure oil case the In vated. configu the of elapsing after k1 is activated relay time. delay the application, above mentioned the for Especially be mo can pressure oil the which software with is a enqui (please onspeed rotation the depending tored 1000m is devices the distance between permitted The reduced is wiring placing, of decentralized case In wit contact transfer A wires.floating to 2 30 from on available 3A is and 250VAC/DC of load permitted receiver. the of side the Solution: are con- 2 and 1 inputs input-menu, suitable a With isas value Amin.-limiting display. the by figured microprocessor the contains station relay the Since berealized. can connection almostany system, software suitable offer to are ready we request, On adaptions. After configuration of thedisplay data station, can be the removed. LCD- Thisfunction will notof the influence devices. the 45 10 9 46 8 47 r er k1 k2 k3 k4 k5 k6 k7 e RelayStation AHDR101 7 , 48 om gine a or- ays uts 49

e a of e ng ng serial in 2 in serial 6 50 k15 k14 k13 k12 k11 k10 k9 k8

5 51 serial in 1 in serial 4

AHD R101 AHD 24VDC 2 + 1 33 34 3536 37 38 39 40 The analog data station has 15 inputs and and can inputs has 15 data station The analog and/or sensors following the evaluate and register signals: signals binary 0(2)-10V, 0(4)-20mA, Pt1000, Pt100, request). upon ones (customer-specific LCD-dis- the datastation, the of For configuration There used. is keyboard external with AHD 524 play limiti to two up e.g. assign to possibility, isthe output, inf the serial a Over input. each to values mation, if and which inputs reached limiting values limiting reached inputs which if and mation, 12 e.g.,input reaches if, that means This 15. to 1 input. another by blocked Example: pressur oil of lub. the registration is for 1 Input to current correspond input 4-20mA Diesel-engine. be shall pressure, an alarm bar 1.5At 10bar. to 0 en the 2, input Over station. relay the by released speed. run idle as or same the are transmitted to the relay station. Here, the inp the Here, station. relaythe to transmitted are relthe to assigned data station are the 15 of to 1 15 measu- Thus, switches. k12relay value, limiting of eachothe independendt that are transformers ring delays fr switch-off and Switch-on be realized. can b can input each Also, be configured. can 999s to 1 cor- (4-20mA 4-20mA-signal a over isentered speed monitoring pressure Oil 1/min). 0-3000 to respond 8s high speed is the engine once done be only shall 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 8 10 911 12 13 parallel-serial transformation of analog limiting v limiting analog of transformation parallel-serial 2 wires, up to 1000m transmission length Data Station AHD903-15 Data Station

ribbon cable ribbon ' ? > ß N G U ESC PAUSE DRUCK Analog . \ : / - < * +_ # ÖÜ F6 T Pt100, Pt1000, 0(4)-20mA, 0(2)-10V, binary signals binary 0(2)-10V, 0(4)-20mA, Pt1000, Pt100, request) upon ones (customer-specific F M F1 2 $ Ä L F5 6 3 9 S Z E F11 Bild Bild NUM ALT Enter 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 31 32 ' § % 8 5 2 F4 K F1 0 R Y D E ntf. = ! 1 4 0 F9 7 J F3 E inf. C 1 Pos E nde ; , ) " serial transmission I P B S trg WX Funct ` ( F1 F2 F7 F8 V H A OQ SPACE 1 2 3 4 7 3 4 5 6 2 1 Input no.: Input

5-pole DINplug-in connection - 24VDC±25% + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1

AHD524 24VDC±25% +- CONTRAST 2050

450 450 2050

450 82 82

DIM ISMAX ribbon cable 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 5 8 similar inputs - + INFO 8 similar inputs ME RotationPt. speed 1/min 580 1962 81.1 ME Cool.Pt. water temp.°C ME Cool.Pt. water press. bar 1.8 3.03 ME EnginePt. speed 1/m 1561 ME GearPt. oil pressurebar 8.8 10.3 397 ME RowPt. exh.gas A tp.°C 392 ME RowPt. exh.gas B tp.°C MTStb. Oil pressure bar 1.5 4.39 ME Stb. Rotation speed 1/min 580 1962 80.4 ME Stb. Cool. wat. temp. °C ME Stb. Cool. wat. press. bar 1.8 3.03 ME Stb. speedEngine 1/m 1568 ME Stb. Gear oil press. bar 8.8 10.3 376 ME Stb. ARow exh.g. °C tp. ME Oil Pt. pressure bar 1.5 4.39 PANEL : 1 U MIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON BÖNING 13 524-4-e.MCD AHD 524 CONTRAST CONTRAST AHD524 DIM DIM IS MAX 14:50 14:50 - 12:15 - Time T no. 9:20 2 : 12 47 : 03 500 00 372 400 365 400 35 463 35 32 462 38 30 460 40 35 465 35 33 463 37 32 462 38 35 465 35 31 461 39 37 467 33 30 460 40 33 463 37 31 461 39 35 465 35 - - AlarmPanel Exhaust Gas AverageValue System + + Examples for design of pages (masks) pages design of for Examples INFO INFO ALARM PANEL: Date PANEL 4 : U MIN * Shift[+] [-] Backspace [Info] Start false block air manoeuvre 07.03. Failure 24Vremote control 07.03. Lub. oil pressure MEStb. 07.03. CYLINDER A1 °C BLOCKING RANGE 2 AVERAGE VALUE MAX CYLINDER TEMP. CYLINDER A2 °C CYLINDER A3 °C CYLINDER A4 °C CYLINDER A5 °C CYLINDER A6 °C CYLINDER B1 °C CYLINDER B2 °C CYLINDER B3 °C CYLINDER B4 °C CYLINDER B5 °C CYLINDER B6 °C AFTER TURBO A °C AFTER TURBO B °C ON ON Böning Böning - CONTRAST CONTRAST AHD 524 AHD 524 450

2050 450 450 2050

82 82

Al...... + DIM DIM IS MAX 7 7 166 108 122 (6) (6) Trimtank 2 (7) Trimtank 3 (8) Trimtank 4 (5) Trimtank 1 Al...... +Al...... + Al...... + ) (5) (6) (7) (8) Al...... + Al...... - - - Al...... - Al...... + TankDisplays + + AnalogReports PANEL3: Content Tank Displays 1 ME Pt. Row A exh.gas tp. °C 397 ME Stb. Cool. wat. temp. °C 80.4 ME Pt. Rotation speed 1/min 580 1962 ME Pt. Cool.water temp. °C 81.1 ME Pt. Cool.water press. bar 1.8 3.03 ME Pt. Row B exh.gas.tp. °C 392 ME Stb. Oil pressure bar 1.5 4.39 ME Stb. Rotation speed 1/min 580 1962 ME Stb. RowAexh.gas.tp. °C 376 ME Pt. Oil pressure bar 1.5 4.39 ME Pt. Engine speed 1/m 1561 ME Pt. Gearoil press. bar 8.8 10.3 ME Stb. Cool. wat. press. bar 1.8 3.03 ME Stb. Engine speed 1/m 1568 ME Stb. Gear oil press. bar 8.8 10.3 PANEL 2 : U MIN INFO INFO (2) Bottom tank2 (3) Sidetank 1 (4) Sidetank 2 (1) Bottomtank 1 full 3/4 1/2 1/4 empty (cm) 98.6 110 195 215 18 (1) (2) (3) (4 ON ON Böning Böning keysor the info-key. Displayscan be called up by paging with the + and

14 CHAMBER/MESSROOM PANEL AHD 406-2

AHD 406-2 is a device for control desk mounting used as chamber and messroom panel within the scope of failure report systems and/or stand-by alarm systems on ships. It receives data via a serial bus from one of the following devices:

- AHD W Data Distributor (Version B) - AHD 406H Group Alarm Panel with 10 groups - KOMPAKT EDA 47 Group Alarm Panel with 16 to 48 groups

2. Device assembly

The device is designed for wall installation with an installation depth of only 26mm. It consists of an electronic card and a two-piece front panel containing the text field. The alarm / message LEDs can be dimmed depending on the ambient brightness.

The connections installed by the shipyard are carried out via an 11-pole terminal block mounted on the circuit board.

3. Function

At least one of the devices mentioned under pos. 1 must be part of the alarm system. The device contains all alarms/status messages that can be assigned to one of 15 groups. They are transmitted to the chamber and messroom panel via serial bus, where they are displayed as alarm or message.

Unlike status messages, alarms activate the integrated buzzer and flashing of the corresponding LED in the front panel. The horn relay closes at the same time.

Apart from the serial input, the chamber / messroom panel also has one binary input each for Fire and Engineer call messages. The binary inputs are galvanically separated from each other and the rest of the electronics and operate independently. One buzzer and one LED in the front panel are assigned to each binary input.

3.1 Acknowledgement

The acoustic alarm (horn) is acknowledged via the button on the front panel, or via serial bus on one of the devices mentioned under pos. 1. Optical alarm acknowledgement is only possible via serial bus. Engineer and Fire calls can neither be acknowledged acoustically nor optically on the device, but on the corresponding alarm trigger. Dimensional Drawing Panel Cut-Out 4727maße.mcd 31

72 26 install. depth 62

Diameters of the bores depend ° on the used screws. 5 4 On Duty circuit board Terminal Diagram

AHD 406-2 Fire ENG-call manual 61

Manual Eng.-Call Fire 144 119 134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 131 + -

+-- + 24VDC±25% external horn external 24VDC serial input serial 24VDC

FAULT A self-adhesive foil with this drawing is part of delivery and can be used as stencil. POWER TEST 11-pole BÖNING AHD 406-2 terminal block photo-resistor for automatic Technical Data dimming of the LEDs 4.3 gasket 49 lowered acc. DIN Power supply: 24VDC +/- 25% transparent polymer foil glued Power consumpt. of the electronics: appr. 0.2A into upper part of the front plate outside device Perm. charge of relay contacts: 50V/2A framing Serial interface: TTY-current loop Data transmission rate: 1200 Baud In order to access the text field, both parts Weight: 0.5kg must be removed from the front plate. Protection class: IP 66/67 at front IP 00 at rear side

08 414kats englisch III.doc START / STOP DIESEL CONTROL UNIT

AHD 414

AHD 414 is a microprocessor controlled start/stop diesel engine control and monitoring device for control desk mounting. It is available in several versions, depending on the individual engine manufacturing series.

- device for control desk mounting - integrated programmable firing speed and overspeed monitoring (frequency dependent) - individual problem solutions possible - small and robust design - high load capacity of the relay outputs - low power consumption (app. 0.15A) - designed for high power supply fluctuations - 22 pole plug terminal block - serial bidirectional interface - available with add-on front cover, locking with sliding bolt or lock - approved by: GL (other classification organisations on request)

CONTENTS

PAGE

1. General 3 2. Assembly 3

3. Main functions 3 3.1 Engine startup 3 3.2 Stopping the engine 4 3.3 Alarm acknowledgement 4 3.4 Resetting 4

4. Programming 4 5. Wire break stop circuits/sensor circuits 4 6. Remote control 5

Order related technical specification page 1 6 Order related technical specification page 2 7 Order related technical specification page 3 8 Order related technical specification page 4 9

2 Start Stop Diesel Control Unit

1. General

AHD 414 is a microprocessor controlled device. The original version was designed for starting, stopping and monitoring of diesel engines. The device can be adjusted to different requirements with several software variations that can be called up by the user.

Its features are:

- device for switchboard mounting - integrated firing and overspeed monitoring (frequency dependent) - optional individual problem solutions - small and robust construction - relay outputs with high load capacity - low power consumption (0.15 A app.) - designed for high power supply fluctuations - approved by: Germanischer Lloyd

2. Assembly

AHD 414 consists of an electronic card with a processor system and all necessary periphery components. The card is fixed to a front cover consisting of AlMg1 with 4 spacer bolts. All ICs are plugged into mounting sockets. The programme is stored either in an EPROM 27C256 or 28C256. All inputs and outputs lead to a pluggable 22-pole terminal block. The card contains a bi-directional serial interface (TTY). Labeling is possible by the following methods:

- silk-screen printing of the front panel by anodizing - printed foil is inserted between front frame and front panel

The unit is accommodated in a housing corresponding to DIN 43700 for control desk mounting with a front frame (dimensions: 144mm x 144mm) and an installation depth of 53mm. The device can be equipped with a front cap with turnbuckle or lock if required.

3. Main functions

3.1 Engine startup

The engine can be started directly on the AHD 414 or by means of a second device, acting as a remote control where none of the following criteria apply:

- start blocking input is active - stop alarm is activated - engine already on - operating switch on motor activated (if available) - lubricant oil pressure is not low

Depending on the instructions of the attached order related technical specification, the engine has to pre-glow or start immediately. The pre-glowing time can be programmed arbitrarily. The starting process is finished once the programmed frequency is emitted by the tacho-generator. The duration of a single start trial as well as the number of start trials are also programmable.

Prior to switching on the starter, the program checks whether the oil pressure is low or the tachogenerator picks up a signal. Where at least one of the aforementioned criteria applies, the starter is not activated, instead the automatic supervision is switched on. The starter is thus optimally protected. The parameters do not lead to a break-off of the actual start process but prevent its initiation.

3 Start Stop Diesel Control Unit

3.2 Stopping the engine

The engine can be stopped manually on the AHD 414, externally by a remote stop or by a stop alarm., A solenoid or operating magnet can be used as possible stop actuator (programmable).

3.3 Alarm acknowledgement

The lower button on the device has the function of acknowledging horn and optics as well as performing a lamp test.

3.4 Resetting

The reset button on the device resets acknowledged alarms to their original state. It can moreover interrupt an active stop signal.

4. Programming

This description includes an ORDER-RELATED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION that is the basis for our production. It is filled out by the customer according to his specific requirements. Where a programming device is available (e.g. the battery operated S4 that can be supplied by Böning) the user can quickly modify the parameters that may be of importance during commissioning.

The following parameters are programmable: - pre-glowing time - number and duration of start trials - frequency of firing speed and overspeed - solenoid or operating magnet - stop time - delay times - inputs (NC or NO) - wire break monitoring of the inputs - inputs (display or alarm) - suppression of alarms, depending on kind of operation (e. g. oil pressure) - inputs 7, 8 and/or 9 can be used as power switch input e.g. for release of oil pressure alarms.

The programme furthermore includes a variety of special functions (starting on page 2 of the ORDER- RELATED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS) that can be easily activated by the user entering storage addresses. The possibilities are continuously extended according to customer requirements. Thus, it is possible to assign different functions to relays (e.g. auto-stop, engine ready for start...), which are not needed in the basic version (e.g. horn, pre-glowing...).

5. Wire break stop circuits/sensor circuits

There is a permanent low test current on the stop output. The alarm „wire break stop circuit/sensor circuit“ is released where this current is interrupted. Should only this LED flash, the stop circuit is interrupted. If a sensor wire is interrupted, the above-mentioned LED as well as the corresponding sensor LED flash. Z-diodes BZX 5V6 are used for wire break monitoring of the binary alarm inputs where cyclic voltage of less than 5.6V (alarm mode) and of more than 5.6V (wire break mode) is switched. The wire break supervision is thus also used as internal system check since the inputs must switch in the same cycle. If a Z-diode is reversely connected it functions as a closed contact.

4 Start Stop Diesel Control Unit

6. Remote control

AHD 414 bi-directional serial interface (TTY) enables communication with other data stations. It is possible to use a second device as a remote control.

Remote control

414fer-e.mcd

S T ENGINE IS RUNNING A R WIRE BREAK T STOP- / SENSOR CIRCUIT S T START FAILURE STOP O P FAILURE TACHOGENERATOR

OVERSPEED STOP RESET OIL PRESSURE MIN STOP

TEST

START BLOCKING/STOP

ENB ENGINE IS PRE-GLOWING D E

N BÖNINGR AHD I G

L 414 ENGINE IS STARTING ANLAGEN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Horn Supply Supply

On site Measuring point no.

S T ENGINE IS RUNNING A 1 R WIRE BREAK T 2 STOP-/SENSOR CIRCUIT S START FAILURE STOP T 3 O P 4 FAILURE TACHOGENERATOR 5 OVERSPEED STOP RESET 6 OIL PRESSURE MIN STOP 7

8 TEST 9 10 STARTBLOCKING/STOP

ENB ENGINE IS PRE-GLOWING D E

N R AHD

I BÖNING G

L 414 ENGINE IS STARTING ANLAGEN K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

(-) 6 7 8 9 10 Meas. point no.

The minus poles of both supplies have to be connected. Voltage Firing speed Firing Serial in Serial out Serial Collective report Collective Starter Remote start Remote Horn on system Alarm Tachogen. Pre-glowing magnet Solenoid/operat. Remote stop Remote 4-40V or 4-40V

5 Start Stop Diesel Control Unit

414ers2E.MCD r- max5 ust beensuredust 53 : 24VDC 25% ± or12VDC : appr. 0.15 A : starter- and solenoid/ operating magnet circuit - 20 A peek current - 10 A cont. current - all other relays 2 A : 99% : 138 mm x 138 mm : with front cap IP 54 : 53 mm : 0.5 Kg

basic function, event. addit. functions, startingon page 2 136

ORDER-RELATED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 144 PAGE 1 OUT OF 1 OUT PAGE 4 PAGES T S T A R T S O P TEST for safetyfor the reasonsstarterthat circuit is inte rupted is whileactive. input this RESET TECHNICAL DATA Power supply Power consumpt. of electronics Perm. load of relay contacts Prem. rel. airhumidity Panel cut-out Protection class Installation depth Weight 144 Attention: If the blocking is input start used, m it ENGINE ISPREGLOWING ENGINE ISSTARTING ENGINE

(-) Serial out Serial

Serial in Serial

Remote stop Remote

Remote start Remote

- SENSORCIRCUIT or 4-40V Symbol: View: SUPERVISION ON WIRE BREAK - STOP CIRCUIT START FAILURE SPEEDSENSOR FAILURE OVERSPEEDSTOP START BLOCKING sensor Speed BÖNING 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 2221 20 19 18 17 16 5 Measuring point text point Measuring ts, Z-Dioden BZX5V6/1.3W alarm system.

6 7 8 9 10 opens appr. 5 s after starting of opens in the event of analarm.

Meas. point no. K7

Collect. report Collect. ed and thenopens again

ntacts. (3) (2)

grün green yellow red yellow red red red yellow yellow yellow LED

COLOR on system Alarm

(1)

Horn

_ _ K5

s = 01 = s Firing speed Firing K4

Solenoid/oper. magnet Solenoid/oper. K3

Starter

_ K2

K1 Preglowing min 0008 Hz 0008 min Hz9999 max Voltage __ _ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 14 13 12 11 9 10 8 7 6 5 3 4 2 1 _ _ switchstop emerg. function input MALLY AND TWO-DIGIT. 3FE73FE8 4600 4601 Operating Manual ______low low no = 00 = no yes cont. C0 cont. yes C9 cont. no 5 9 3 Fd1 ss address address __ _ Contact closes afterswitching on of the device. It the engine in order to "arm" an eventually existing Contact closes afterswitching on of the device. It It closes forappr. 2 s, if anotheralarm is releas (collective alarm repetition). Forwire breaksupervision of the stop alarm circui (part ofdelivery) are installed parallelto the co (only for 24V power supply) supervision Wire break Wire (1) (2) (3) TERMINAL DIAGRAM TERMINAL STANDARD - STANDARD ______by high high _ _ meas. pt. 1 pt. meas. Suppression 3FB7 3FB5 3FB8 3FB6 _ _

Alarm=0000= no 00 = no 00 = no (E-Prom 27C256) (E-Prom ALARM Type-Chip DISPLAY/ _ _ 3FA8 3FC8 ______INPUT 3F95 3FA5 3FC5 3F99 (idle/operat.) _ _ _ min: 3 Fd0 sec : 3 Fd2 sec: 3 Fd3 Hz: 3 Fd4 3 Fd Hz: 3 Fd8 3 Fd sec: 3 FdA : 3 FdB : 2E99 no 01 no = 00= no NC=00 yes = 01= yes NO=01 Display=0101= yes 01 = yes 01 = yes ye 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 ______STOP NC/NO 3F87 3F82 3F85 3F88 3F86 ______DELAY 3F76 3F96 3FA6 3FC6 3FE6 3F70 3F75 3F78 3F98 3F77 3F97 3FA7 3FC7 EPROM Content EPROMEPROM EPROM EPROM EPROM EPROM EPROM EPROM address (1/4sec) addressaddress address address address addre 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Rear view without cover Measuring at overspeed pluggable terminal block ENTERINGINTO THE EPROM ADDRESSES MUST BE DONE DECI Preglowing time EMPTY EPROM ADDRESSES HAVE THECONTENT "00". Number of start trials Durationof one start trial Frequency of the speed sensor at termination of starting procedure Frequency of the speed sensor Stop time Solenoid (content 00) Operatingmagnet (content 01) Overspeed function point no. point

6 Start Stop Diesel Control Unit 414ers3E.MCD alert ORDER-RELATED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION m system on systemm ction K6 ON auto-stopat ON K6 K6 OFF atK6 auto-stop OFF Engine stopsEngine operating Switches magneton with drops again andafter seconds 2 starter Switches on with drops and afterseconds trial2 start supervisionisIf activated, switching 2fordone can input sec. via be 10 16) K7.(terminal Collective alarm Collective PAGE 2 OUT OF 2 OUT PAGE 4 PAGES

Alar 3FE5 00 Empty storage-addresses have the content "00". content the have storage-addresses Empty K7 K7 3FE6 00 01 01 K6 02 03 04 03 04 02 05 Relay Address Relay Content Fun unction min. after stop Solenoid Starter Firing speed Horn Pre-glowing stopped Engine automatically Relay forswitches the lub.oil-pump 20 stopped Engine automatically magnetOperating ready Engine startfor Overspeed start Relay changes trialeach at not ready Engine start for Start failure K2 K2 3FE1 00 01 04 01 K3 3FDB 00 01 K4 3FE3 00 01 K5 3FE4 00 01 K1 K1 3FE0 00 02 03 03 04 03 04 03 04 03 04 02 02 02 02

Relay Address F Content

7 Start Stop Diesel Control Unit

414ers4e.MCD 21 (SPECIALFUNCTIONS) ORDER-RELATED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Shutter 00 = Engine is running if there is a vol- is there is a if running Engine 00 = (1035VDC) terminalat 18. to tage 01 = Engine is norunning is there is if Engine 01 = terminalat 18. voltage PAGE 3 OUT OF 3 OUT PAGE PAGES 4 than 7 Hz). 7than Battery plus protection). wledge first. p, please acknowledge please p, 4603 17 18 Empty storage addresses have the content "00". content the have addresses storage Empty to address 3FDA (see page 1). (see page 3FDA address to Battery minus Battery plus Battery from D+or alternator s. and frequency signaland failure. frequency e wire for monitored break). failure terminal D+, (input 9,control) loading failureD+, terminal (input pressure. ing of time entered into address 3FDA (see page3FDA(see 1). ing into enteredtime of address ne has completely stalled (speed smallerfrequency stalled completely (speed ne has nal. hermostat (only if this input is active) input (only this hermostat if ssure (preglow relay switches pre-lub. pump). pre-lub. (preglow ssure relay switches wer than P-oil-pressure-switch than(additionalwer starter P-oil-pressure-switch to stop" to top signal by reset, or, at auto stop, ackno please reset, ator, top bysignal auto top signal by "Starting of Engine", or, ator, sto Engine", auto "Startingtop bysignal of ntil speed = zero plus the time that was enteredthat in plus speedthezero ntil time = g of the engine it will be afterglowed for appr. 10 appr. for g willthe it of engine be afterglowed SPECIALFUNCTIONS 01 = Terminal 16 for conditional preglowing, e.g. t e.g. 16 conditionalfor 01 preglowing, = Terminal 00 = Normal 00 = Normal "overspeed". or 01 = Input 9 becomes remote start input (can also b remotebecomes input 9 (can start 01 = Input "au for hasfunction it switchesif the 01 5s, = K1 works as overspeed-test. this 00 = Terminal blocking16 start 00 = Terminal registeredsignal frequency speed is as 00 = Engine sig is is asrunning registered voltage 01 = Engine 01 = If serial input is charged charged with 24V, input is serial If 01 = 00 = Normal 00 = 01 = 01 = engi only stop possible after auto after Reset 00 = Switch-off procedure is terminated after elaps is terminated after Switch-off procedure 00 = 02 = No time limit for stop signal; cancelling of s forcancelling limittime signal; No stop 02 = 01 = No time limit for stop signal; cancelling of s forcancelling limittime signal; No stop 01 = reset first. and in break circuit is stop Wire monitored. 00 = breakmonitoring circuit. in stop wire No 01 = 02 = Engine can only be started at existing oil pre bestartedcan existing at only 02 = Engine 00 = Engine can be started independently of the of oil can independently be started 00 = Engine 01 = Engine can only be started, if oil pressure lo only be01=can Engine oil if started, pressure (overspeed switching point drops appr. 17%) point drops switching appr. (overspeed 00 = Alarm speed sensor failure, if SUPERVISION ON speed SUPERVISION if failure, sensor Alarm 00 = same00and as contentnadditionally at Alarm 01 = Afterglow: relative stop time: stop relative

yes = 01 no = 00 yes= 01 no = 00

address Eprom- 3FFA 3FFB 3FFD 4602 7EE0 3FDF 3FFE 3FFF 3FEB 7EA0 3FDC Engine stops u Engine 3FDC stops 3FEA 3FEA After startin

8 Start Stop Diesel Control Unit

414ers7e.MCD 7. (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS) ORDER-RELATED TECHNICAL SPECIFICTION PAGE 4 OUT PAGE PAGES OF 4 d be transferredKOMPAKT the to alarmEDA systems 4 it-order: elow). ctive), 20 100to ctive), low, bits serial output dataserial to distributor AHD W. d as input dstation. as input T S T A R T S O P TEST RESET ENGINE ISPRE-GLOWING ENGINE STARTING ENGINE ls. Thus, the bits canls. Thus, be programmedthe bits arbitrarily an -SENSOR CIRCUIT 06 SUPERVISION ON WIRE BREAK:-STOP CIRCUIT START FAILURE FAILURETACHOGENERATOR OVERSPEEDSTOP START BLOCKING BÖNING ation ation PS47-1-15. The following protocolshows the b the mentioned beloworder (high-bit, reportif a is 00 00 =serial No communication. 02 =47-1- PS station) data connecte15 (binary is 03 03 = station Serial data input over PSand 47-1-15 AHD05 =parallel406-2display On 06 =data Serial output distributor AHDon W b (see 01 01 = 414asremoteis AHDconnected control. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meas.point no. Empty storage addresses have the content "00". content the have addresses storage Empty 3FDE (Meas. point no. 1) 1. 1. Wire break 2. Firing speed 3. Alarm blocking cancelled 4. Collective alarm 5. Manualstop 6. Engine ready startfor 7. Automatic stop 8. Start programrunning is 9. Meas. point no. 9 10. Meas.10. point no. 8 Meas.11. point no. 7 Meas.12. point no. 6 Start13. failure Failure14. tachogenerator Overspeed15. Output protocoladdress contentofif 3FDE Eprom is Serial Serial communication : Serial Serial outputdistributorAHD datato W In outputthis 414format, data works like AHDa st Format: Startbit (high),according bits 15 data to 1200 areBaud,1200 transmittedtheprotoco databetween

not1-e.mcd EmergencyEmergency power power control automatic device AHD AHD 414 414 withwith mainsMains- power and andgenerator generator power powerregistration registration unit AHD 41device4NG

AHD144 414NG 53

S T MAINS SUPPLY A R T GENERATOR SUPPLY S T FAILURE GENERATOR O P FAILURE ALTERNATOR

WIRE BREAK STOP CIRCUIT RESET OVERSPEED STOP 144 136 LUB. OIL PRESSURE MIN

TEST

START FAILURE

BÖNING ENGINE IS PRE-GLOWING ENGINE IS STARTING AHD 414

max 5

75 A B C D E F E D C B A VIEW "A"

111 T E S T (push button on circuit board)

"A" 111 55 Mains L1,L2 / L1, L3 L1, / L1,L2 Mains Generator L1,L2 / L1, L3 / L1, L1,L2 Generator

Type AHD 414NG 3 x 400V/24V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 mountable on TS 32 and TS 35 Starting, stopping and monitoring of the engine. the of monitoring and stopping Starting,

Generator Mains Combustion 3x Engine

-monitoring of mains and generator power -monitoring of engine -automatic starting in case of power failure Mains contactor -switching off of mains contactor and switching on of generator contactor -automatic switching back to mains operation after restoration of power -automatic stopping of the engine after termination of servo time -test function Generator contactor -critical function

Consumer supply

1. Function 3 2. Assembly AHD 414 3 3. Assembly AHD 414NG 4 4. Function 4 4.1 General function 4 4.2 Engine startup 5 4.3 Stopping the engine 5 4.4 Test operation 4.5 Critical operation 5 4.6 Alarm 5 4.7 Alarm acknowledgement, lamp test 6 4.8 Resetting 6 4.9 Wire break in the stop circuit 6

5. Programming 6

Terminal diagram 7 Dimensional drawing for emergency power unit AHD 414 8 Technical data for emergency power unit AHD 414 8 Dimensional drawing for mains and generator power control unit AHD 414NG 9 Technical data for mains and generator power control unit AHD 414NG 9 Type-code 9 Device specifications 10

2 Emergency power control device AHD 414 with mains power and generator power registration device

1. Functions

The system has the following functions:

- monitoring of mains power and generator power - monitoring of the generator engine - automatic start in case of power failure - switching off mains contactor and switching on generator contactor - switching back to mains operation after main power recovery - stopping the generator engine after lapse of turn-off delay - test function - critical operation

2. Assembly AHD 414

AHD 414 consists of an electronic card with a processor system. The card is fixed to a front panel with four distance bolts made of AIMg3. All ICs are plugged into sockets. The programme is stored in an Eprom 27C256. The inputs and outputs are led to a 22-pole pluggable terminal block. A printed foil between the front frame and the panel functions as labelling. Special editions such as waterproof front panels are possible.

The unit is encased in a housing for control desk installation acc. to DIN 43700. Its front frame dimensions are 144mm x 144mm and its installation depth is 53mm. The device can be equipped with a front cap with turnbuckle or lock if required.

3 3. AHD 414NG assembly

AHD 414NG consists of an electronic card inserted into a housing for mounting on rail TS 32 or 35. The device has a 6-pole and an 8-pole pluggable terminal block. An aluminium cover with LEDs for indication of mains power and generator power protects the device. The electronic card also has auxiliary relays for switching the mains and generator contactors.

4. Function 4.1 General function

Unit AHD 414NG measures all phases of the mains and generator power. The relay configuration of AHD 414NG is designed for the mains contactor to be switched on and the generator contactor to be switched off during stand-by mode. This also applies in the case of low battery power or control device failure.

In the event of mains failure the generator engine is started after elapsing of time t1 and the mains contactor is switched off. If at least one phase has a voltage of app. 85% or less of the rated power, this is treated as mains failure. The default setting of the programmable time t1 is usually 2s. Where the engine does not start, three start attempts are effected, followed by the release of a start failure report. The frequency of the tachogenerator (in case of alternators via terminal W) as well as the generator voltage, serve as feedback for the rotation speed and terminate the start process. Voltage (e.g. terminal D+ of the alternator) can also be used instead of the frequency. In this case, no overspeed monitoring is possible since the necessary information is obtained from the frequency of the tachogenerator. Once the generator supplies power, the generator contactor is switched on after the elapse of the programmable time t2 whose default setting is also 2s. Switching to generator supply is indicated optically by a flashing LED. The horn relay simultaneously switches and an external buzzer can thus be activated.

After main power recovery and the elapse of time t3 the generator contactor is switched off and the mains generator is switched on again. The generator engine now runs for time t4 and is then stopped. Times t3 and t4 can also be programmed. In case of another mains failure during this delay time the generator is switched on immediately.

Mains and generator power are indicated on the power registration unit AHD 414NG by LEDs.

4 4.2 Starting the engine

The engine can either be started manually by pushbutton in the front panel or externally by remote start. Should the generator fail to provide sufficient power, the device restarts it automatically (see section 4.1). Default starting duration is 6s but can be adapted on request. Should the engine not start three start trials are carried out before a start failure report is released.

The engine start trial is terminated in the following cases: - the tachogenerator frequency for termination of the start process is reached. - DC voltage is switched to the rotation speed input - the engine driven generator provides a voltage of at least 85% of the rated power - start failure after three start trials - manual stop

AHD 414NG requires two signals to determine the engine’s operation: Rotation speed and generator voltage. The start process is interrupted should one of these signals be missing. The 4 th measuring point (failure tachogenerator) indicates an alarm.

4.3 Stopping the engine

The engine is stopped either automatically via a stop alarm, manually on the device or externally via remote stop.

The unit is suitable for engines with stop solenoid as well as engines with operating solenoid (programmable).

4.4 Test operation

The device has the following test functions: a) The pushbutton „Test“ in the power control unit AHD 414NG is pushed, simulating the failure of one phase. Here, the device switches to generator operation after obtaining generator power and elapsing of time t2. b) The engine can be started manually through the start button on the front panel or via remote start. During starting procedure the mains supply is upheld even when there is generator power. Should there be no generator power the alarm „Generator Failure“ is released. The generator is activated automatically in the event of mains failure during test operation.

4.5 Critical operation

In some cases of mains power failure, emergency generator power supply must be kept as short as possible. Here, function b) in section „Test operation“ is suitable. The engine simply has to be operated in stand-by mode during the critical period to be able to immediately switch to emergency generator power in case of mains failure. When mains power has been restored and the time t3 has elapsed, the system switches back to mains function without the engine automatically stopping but operating in stand-by mode. This function is cancelled only after manual stop.

4.6 Alarms

Alarms are indicated by a relay switched horn and by flashing of the relevant LED on the front panel. Stop alarms result in the stopping of the engine.

5 4.7 Acknowledgement, lamp test

The lower push button on the device has the function of acknowledging acoustic and optical alarms, as well as lamp test.

4.8 Reset

The reset button on the device resets acknowledged alarms into their basic state. An active stop signal can also be interrupted. This also applies to the GENERATOR FAILURE alarm that is activated in the event of mains failure when the generator has to be activated. After acoustic and optical acknowledgement of this alarm and after reestablishment of mains power, this alarm is cancelled automatically without RESET.

4.9 Wire break in the stop circuit

A test current of approx. 5mA permanently flows through the solenoid coil or operating magnet, even when these are switched off. In the event of failure of this test current, the alarm „WIRE BREAKAGE IN STOP CIRCUIT“ is released. An operating magnet is thus always monitored, even when the engine is switched off and the solenoid is monitored insofar as there is no active stop command.

5. Programming

AHD 414 has an Eprom type 27C256 located on the circuit board in an IC-socket. It stores the system program and data for the relevant application. Equipment specification tables are found on the last page of this manual. Where the device is to be delivered programmed and labelled, these tables are the basis for respective orders and need to be filled out by the customer. The relevant Eprom addresses are provided for all adjustable functions that can be changed by the customer according to his needs. A basic programming device is required for this.

The rear of the housing has to be removed for access to the Eprom.

6 -/operating 414no1-e.mcd ened,

(-)

17 18 18 17 out Serial Serial in Serial

AHD 414 AHD

Tacho- generator AHD 414/ 414NG 414NG 414/ AHD Remote stop Remote diagram Terminal

current is current Alternator Remote start Remote

magnet circuit magnet voltage start A 20 - voltage perm. A 10 - A 2 relays other all - Speed registration Speed system power Emergency w

Generator power registration power Generator

Mains power registration power Mains 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 5 Meas. pt. 9 pt. Meas.

+ Meas. pt. 8 pt. Meas. LED-no. top bottom top LED-no.

- 17 18 18 17 Meas. pt. 7 pt. Meas.

Batt. minus Batt. Speedswitch Generatorcontactor address. Generatorcontactor K7

414no1-e

K6 Mains contactor addressing contactor Mains

Horn K5

K4 Ignition speed Ignition

K3 Solenoid/operat. magnet Solenoid/operat.

K2 Starter

D+ K1 Pre-glowing

17 18 18 17 Alternator Supply Perm. load on relay contacts relay on load Perm. solenoid and : Starter- + - + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 4 2 1 In case of mains operation, relays k6 and k7 are op are k7 and k6 relays operation, of mains In case closed. are they operation of generator in case Battery Battery Battery Battery minus AHD 414NG AHD

Various kinds of rotation speed input; in case a DC a case in input; speed rotation of kinds Various monitoring. overspeed no be will there used,

- A B C D E F E D C B A AHD 414NG/... AHD Mains contactor addressing Generator contactor addressing Mains power Mains registration power Generator registration Perm. load on relay contacts 250VAC/ 10A 250VAC/ contacts relay on load Perm. en: ation of reached.ationstarting the isprocess All voltages are galvanically seperated. galvanically are voltages All put. ts a voltage of voltagets a ofits85% at least rated current.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Generator contactor Generator Mains contactor Mains The starting process of the engine is terminated wh starting engine The of theprocess terminated is - the frequency of the frequency-tachogenerator for the of termin currentis led- DC tachogenerator a in onto the thatdrivengenerator- the the is engine by emi Mains power Mains Generator power Generator If 1 is Ifalternating current,terminals and1 2, and/or 5 and 6 are bridged.

7 414no2-e.mcd Meas. point no.: DIMENSIONAL DRAWING EMERGENCY POWER UNIT AHD 414

144 53

S T MAINS SUPPLY A 1 R T 2 GENERATOR SUPPLY S T 3 GENERATOR FAILURE O P 4 FAILURE TACHOGEN./LIMA 5 WIRE BREAK STOP CIRCUIT RESET 6 OVERSPEED 136 144 7 LUB OIL PRESSURE MIN 8 COOL. WATER TEMP. MAX TEST

9 OIL LEVEL MIN 10 START FAILURE

ENGINE IS PRE-GLOWING MOTEC AHD 414 ENGINE IS STARTING

max 5

Rear view without cover (Eprom 27C256)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

pluggable terminal block

TECHNICAL DATA EMERGENCY POWER UNIT AHD 414

Battery supply : 24VDC or 12VDC, ± 25% Power cons. of the electronics : app. 0,15 A Perm. load of relay contacts : starter-, solenoid- and operating magnet circuit - 20 A starting current - 10 A perm. current - all other relays 2 A Connection : 22-pole plugable terminal block Permitted rel. air humidity : 99% Panel cut-out : 138 mm x 138 mm Protection class at front : with front-cap IP 54 Installation depth : 53 mm Permitted ambient temperature : 0 to 70°C Weight : app. 0,5 Kg

8 414no3_E.mcd

DIMENSIONAL DRAWING

MAINS AND GENERATOR POWER MONITORING SYSTEM AHD 414NG ... A B C D E F E D C B A VIEW "A"

111

TE S T (button on circ. board)

"A" 111 55 Mains L1,L2 / L1, L3 Generator L1,L2 / L1, L3

Type AHD 414NG 3 x 400V/12V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 mountable on TS 32 and TS 35 75

TECHNICAL DATA MAINS AND GENERATOR POWER MONITORING SYSTEM AHD 414NG ...

Battery supply : 24VDC or 12VDC, ± 25% Power cons. of the electronics : app. 0.05 A Perm. load of relay contacts : 250VAC/2A Connection : pluggable terminal blocks, 1 x 8-pole and 1 x 6-pole Perm. ambient temperature : 0 to 70°C Weight : app. 0.2Kg

TYPE DESIGNATIONS

AHD 414NG / 110V/12V : 1 AC current, rated=110VAC, battery=12V AHD 414NG / 230V/12V : 1 AC current, rated=230VAC, battery=12V AHD 414NG / 3 x 400V/12V : 3 AC current, rated=400VAC, battery=12V AHD 414NG / 110V/24V : 1 AC current, rated=110VAC, battery=24V AHD 414NG / 230V/24V : 1 AC current, rated=230VAC, battery=24V AHD 414NG / 3 x 400V/24V : 3 AC current, rated=400VAC, battery=24V rated = mains- or generator voltage, battery = battery voltage

9 Effect Hz Hz min

140s 160s 5 50s 15 1300 2100 414notme.mcd Content

FF FF 5E 2B 05 06 1E Effect Hz Hz min min min 105s 105s 45s 10 900

1730

AHD414/414NG Device Specification Content

C0 C0 3E 1C 07 07 1B

Emergency PowerAutomatic Effect Hz Hz min min 80s 75s 40s 7 2

830 1050

414notme Content 90 90 2B 13 08 0B 18

Meas. point Meas. Effect Hz Hz min min

55s 45s 35s

5 1 3 500 700 Content 60 60 1F 0B 09 10 15

93 Effect Hz Hz min

35s 35s 45s 30s 3 300 300 Content

40 40 12 08 17 25 12 Effect Hz Hz min

30s 6s 17s 30s 25s 2 180 180 Content 30 10 20 0C 06 26 3D 0F 90 S T O P S T A R T

TEST Effect RESET Hz Hz min 9 9 20s 4s 8s 20s 20s 8 8

120 87 1.5 13

7 7 Content 6 6 20 0A 10 08 05 38 7C 0B 9 9 8 8

7 7 Effect Hz Hz 6 6 min Amount of start trials: start of Amount trial: start one of Duration trials: start between Pause 6s 6s 3 10s 2s 4s 15s 15s 1 80 77 9 9

8 8

11 Content 7 7 6 6 10 05 08 05 04 55 7F 09 9 9

8 8 VAC Effect Hz Hz 31 min 7 7 AHD 414 BÖNING 5s 1s 3s 7s 10s 6 6 50 69 0.5

9 Content 8 69 83 05 82 91 02 05 02 03 06 7

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 6

10 Effect 9 Hz Hz min 8 0s 0s 0s 5s 2s 82 Meas.pt. no. 25 58 7 0.2

6 Content 9 00 00 01 00 02 FF B0 03 8 81

address 6 Eprom- 9 300B 16F6 1746 1730 243A 1881 1888 Meas. point 7 (lub. oil pressure) is always is pressure) oil (lub. 7 point Meas. engine. idle at suppressed 8 80 EB 7 6 9 9 9 8 8 S T O P S T A R T 8 49 79 6B 03 TEST 7 7 RESET 7 Mains/generator supply Mains/generator current 3-phase current alternating 1-phase 6 6 6 9 9 9 8 8 or on (t2) on or 8 Stop time Stop 1877 C9 59 E9 02 7 7 supply (t3) supply 7 tprocedure 6 6 6 ENGINE IS PREGLOWING IS ENGINE STARTING IS ENGINE 9 9 Pre-glowing time time Pre-glowing 9 8 8 8 59 01 F9 7 7 7 VDC 6 6 6 9 9 9 After-run time of engine (t4) engine of time After-run 8 8 8 D9 D9 00 7 6 6 6 MAINS SUPPLY MAINS SUPPLY GENERATOR FAILURE GENERATOR SENS./ALTERNATOR SPEED FAIL. CIRCUIT STOP BREAK WIRE OVERSPEED PRESSURE OIL LUBE FAILURE START AHD414 BÖNING Frequency of speed sensor at overspeed at sensor speed of Frequency Time from power failure until engine start (t1) start engine until failure power from Time 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 10 Meas.pt. no. Time from gen. voltage available until gen. contact gen. until available voltage gen. from Time Time from rest. of power until switch over to mains to over switch until power of rest. from Time Frequency of speed sensor until termination of star of termination until sensor speed of Frequency

Engine speed Nominal 1/min Solenoidmagnet Operating 01 Content 3FDB address Eprom 00 Content 3FDB address Eprom Battery voltage Battery Meas. point Meas. contact NO idle is motor if alarm, No 7 7 Content of Eprom address 1870 address Eprom of Content 1E83 address Eprom of Content alarm Stop 187A address Eprom of Content

e.g. terminal D is used. is D terminal e.g. + Details do not apply, if constant speed signal speed constant if apply, not do Details Meas. points can points Meas. de- arbitrarily be customer. by fubed

10 Standby pump and compressor control AHD 408 series

AHD 408 E

- Microprocessor controlled device for flush mounting. - Controls two independent pairs of electrical pumps. - Selector switches for main pumps and standby pumps are installed on the front panel. - After power-on, the standby pumps build up pressure. Then the system switches over to the main pumps. - In the event of loss of pressure, the standby pumps start automatically, triggering an alarm. - In case of a black-out, all pumps cease functioning. After restoration of power supply, the pumps restart after a preset time. - Pressure and operational mode of the pumps, black-out as well as standby alarms are indicated by status LEDs. - Labelling can be exchanged easily.

AHD 408 A

- Microprocessor controlled device for flush mounting. - Mainly used for lubrication and gearbox oil pumps, where the main pumps are directly driven off a diesel engine. - Controls the standby pumps relative to oil pressure and diesel engine speed. - Standby pumps are switched on at low engine speed (normal), and also at high engine speed combined with falling pressure (abnormal, standby alarm). - Labelling can be exchanged easily.

AHD 408 E-K

- Microprocessor controlled device for flush mounting. - Upper half of device is for one pair of standby pumps (compare AHD 408E) - Lower half is for one pair of compressors and operates as follows: - Switches on main and standby compressor relative to air pressure. - If the running time of the main and standby compressor exceeds the preset time, a standby alarm is triggered. - A selector switch for main and standby compressor is installed on the panel. - In case of a blackout, both compressors cease functioning. After restoration of power, they start after a preset time. - Labelling can be exchanged easily.

All devices GL-certified

Development, manufacturing and service for shipping and industry Böning Automationstechnologie GmbH & Co. KG • Am Steenöver 4 • D-27777 Ganderkesee Phone: +49(0)4221 9475-0 • Fax: +49(0)4221 9475-22 • www.boening.com • e-mail: [email protected] Standby Pump and Compressor Control - Series AHD 408

Contents

Page

1. General information about all types of devices 3

2. AHD 408E, standby-pump control for 2 pairs of electrical pumps 3 2.1 Features 3 2.2 Remote control of the pumps 4 2.3 System failure 4 Terminal diagramme 5 Programming 5 Technical data 5 Labelling of panel 5 Standby-pump control AHD 408E with remote control 6 Dimensional drawing 13

3. AHD 408A, standby-pump control for appended main pumps 7 3.1 Features 7 Terminal diagramme 8 Programming 8 Technical data 8 Labelling of panel 8 Dimensional drawing 13

4. AHD 408AE, as AHD 408 A, but with additional priming-pump control and exclusion of unimportant consumers 9 4.1 Features 9 Terminal diagramme 10 Programming 10 Technical data 10 Labelling of panel 10 Dimensional drawing 13

5. AHD 408E-K, standby-pump and compressor control 11 5.1 Features 11 Terminal diagramme 12 Programming 12 Technical data 12 Labelling of panel 12 Dimensional drawing 13

System report for the alarm system 14 Cut-out text labels 15

2 Description

1. General remarks for all types of devices

AHD 408-systems are microprocessor-controlled devices for flush mounting. They are plug- in units which consist of two electronic cards in a sandwich-construction and a front panel. It is accommodated in a housing compliant with DIN 43700. The front dimensions are 72 mm x 144 mm and the installation depth is 216 mm.

All inputs and outputs are led to a 24-pole terminal block, which is located on the rear side of the housing. The inputs are separated from the rest of the electronics by optocouplers. There are floating relay contacts available for activation of the pump contactors and/or compressor contactors. In case of auxiliary power failure or electronic fault the system returns automatically to a working condition.

One type of housing is used for all devices. The terminals are arranged in such a way to avoid damage which might otherwise result from unintentionally fitting an incorrect plug-in unit. A plug-in unit type AHD 408E in a housing of e. g. AHD 408A will not function. It will, however, cause no damage.

The label card in the front panel can be inserted from above. In order to change the card, the plug-in unit has to be withdrawn a little. The label card is protected by transparent plastic foil.

The devices can be supplied with a standard front frame or a plastic cover to increase the degree of protection.

2. AHD 408E, standby-pump control for 2 independently operating pairs of electrical pumps

2.1 Features

For each pair of standby pumps, two keys are installed on the front panel. The selector switch ‘Main Pump’ determines which of the two pumps (1 or 2) is to act as main pump. Thus, the other pump is defined as standby pump. The pump pairs are activated by selecting the corresponding ‘ON’ button.

When switched on, the computer system first checks whether the pressure is sufficient. As this won’t be the case very often, the standby pump starts first to build up the pressure. Once the pressure is sufficient the standby pump cuts out and the main pump starts. The delay interval can be programmed (t4). It is thus ensured that the standby-pump is operational at all times. Should the standby pump fail to build up sufficient pressure within the programmed delay interval (t1), a standby alarm is triggered.

Should the pressure fall during operation, the main pump cuts out and the standby-pump is started after elapsing of time (t4). Simultaneously, the standby-alarm is triggered as follows:

- red LED STANDBY-ALARM flashes on the front panel - transistor output with same labelling for remote indicator is activated - relay contact for collective alarm opens - relay contact for collective alarm repetition closes for approx. 3s and then reopens

In the event of a power failure affecting the pumps during operation (blackout), the relays of the standby-pump control automatically switch to a position preventing immediate start-up of

3 the pumps once power is restored. The pumps are not reactivated until the programmed delay interval (t3) has elapsed. This prevents overload of the board power system. The time t1 is used to build up pressure again.

In case of power failure or electronics breakdown, all relays switch to standby position. When the pump control is activated, the main pumps are switched. Most likely, they were already in operation.

Even in case of breakdown of the electronics, the service pump can be switched on manually by means of the selector switch. As the collective alarm relay also shuts off in this case, a signal is transmitted to a commonly installed alarm system.

Besides the mentioned function, the ON switches also have a reset function. An active standby alarm is reset by switching off and then on again.

2.2 Remote control of the pumps

The previously described function refers to local operation, i.e. the pump control is located near the pumps or in the engine control room. If a remote control, e.g. on the bridge, is required, an additional binary data station PS 47-1-08 is necessary (see page 5 of this manual).

The switches with the function ‘Remote control - Stop - Local control’ (S3) and the selector switches with ‘stop function’ (S1, S2) are connected to this binary data station. The station transforms the switch positions to a serial output signal which is transmitted via a single wire to the standby pump control.

If the switch S3 is in ‘Local Control’ position, the remote control is switched off and AHD 408E is operated directly at the device. In this case S1 and S2 have no function. If the switch is in ‘Remote Control’ position, the switches S1 and S2 are enabled, i.e. they are selector switches to determine which pumps shall work as main or standby pumps. The pumps can also be switched off from here.

2.3 System failure

In case of a failure of the standby-pump-control, the red LED indicates ‘System Fault’ on the front panel by a permanent light. Furthermore, the collective alarm relay shuts off. If the binary data station PS 47-1-08 does not transmit any data, or if the switches S1, S2 or S3 are not connected correctly, the LED ‘System Fault’ flashes. The collective-alarm relay also shuts off. The ‘collective-alarm repeat relay’ responds for a few seconds.

4 e1-e.mcd

AHD 408E - permissible load of relay contacts K1 to K5, 250VAC/3A collective alarm repetition and collective alarm relay 48VDC/AC/1A K1 K4 - In the status displayed here, the device is without power. All pressures are lower than the point of reaction of the pressure switches.

K2 K5 - After switching on of the power supply, the relay switches collective alarm. Pp II/2 = Mainpp., PpI/2 = St.-by-Pp = PpI/2 Mainpp., = II/2 Pp St.-by-Pp = I/2 Pp Mainpp., = I/2 Pp St.-by-Pp = PpI/2 Mainpp., = II/2 Pp St.-by-Pp = I/2 Pp Mainpp., = I/2 Pp ON OFF ON OFF

K3 K6 medium medium slow 5 x5 20mm 2 x0.5A 2 A B C D 1 2 3 E F G H 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

P1 P2 collect. alarm repetition collect.alarm Pump I/1 Pump I/2 Pump Pump II/1 Pump +24V/0.1A II/2 Pump +24V/0.1A 24VDC/AC St.-by- Alarm St.-by- Alarm Black-out The EEprom (Type 28C64) is located on the upper card of the plug-in unit. If it has to be reprogrammed, the plug-in unit has to be torn out after loosening the screw in the front panel.

(1) Upper part EEprom Content EEprom Content EEprom Content of device address (min) address (sec) address (NC/NO) Marking of the t1 1700 1701 ------t2 ------1702 ------pump circuit t3 ------1703 ------t4 ------1705 ------MAIN PUMP Press. switch ------1704 ST.-BY-PUMP 1) Pressure at closed contact Content of address = 01 Pressure at opened contact Content of address = 00 t1) Permitted time from switching on the st.-by-pump until reaching operating pressure ST.-BY-ALARM during the start program. This time is identical with the time that is available for the operating pump after a black-out to redevelop the pressure (0-99min and 59s). PRESSURE t2) Time between pressure drop and stopping of the main pump (0-99s) NORMAL t3) Time until restarting of the operating pump after a black-out (0-99s). Marking of the t4) Time from stopping of the st.-by-pump until starting of the main pump during the start program and at st.-by-alarm from main pump off until st.-by-pump on. pump circuit MAIN PUMP (1) Lower part EEprom Content EEprom Content EEprom Content of device address (min) address (sec) address (NC/NO) ST.-BY-PUMP t1 1710 1711 ------t2 ------1712 ------ST.-BY-ALARM t3 ------1713 ------t4 ------1715 ------PRESSURE Press. switch ------1714 NORMAL TECHNICAL DATA Power supply : 24VDC/AC Consumption of the electronics : app. 0.3A Text field for marking, Degree of protection cutting out and insertion - Front : - IP 20 (with front-cap IP 54) from top into the front - Rear : - IP 00 panel. Installation depth : 216mm Panel cutout : 138mm x 67mm Weight : app. 1kg

5 E1f-e.mcd St.-By Pump Control AHD 408E with Remote Control

K2 K5 - After switching on of the power supply, the relay

Pp II/2 = main pp., ppI/2 = St.-by-pp = ppI/2 pp., main = II/2 Pp St.-by-pp = I/2 pp pp., main = I/2 Pp St.-by-Pp = PpI/2 pp., Main = II/2 Pp St.-by-Pp = I/2 Pp pp., Main = I/2 Pp switches collective alarm. ON OFF ON OFF

K3 K6 medium slow medium 5 x 20mm x 5 2 x 0.5A x 2

A B C D 1 2 3 E F G H 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16

+ - P1 P2 collect.alarm repetition collect. alarm Pump I/1 Pump I/2 Pump Pump II/1 Pump II/2 Pump +24V/0.1A +24V/0.1A 24VDC 24VDC St.-by- Alarm St.-by- Alarm Black-out

Parallel-serial-transformer Type PS 47-1-08

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

+ - serial data

Dimensional drawing PS 47-1-08

111 24VDC 24VDC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 462 4 6 2 8 10 4 6 12

S1 S2 S3 20.824 5 5

mountable on TS 32 and TS 35 Example Example 9 2 x Klöckner Möller Klöckner Möller PS 47-1-08 Art. no. 907788 Art. no. 907789 (-) (-) switch position 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0 2 76

Pos 1: Pump I = main pump, pump II = st.-by-pump Pos 1: Remote control Pos 0: Pump I and II stop Pos 0: All pumps stop 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Pos 2: Pump II = main pump, pump I = st.-by-pump Pos 2: Local control pluggable terminal block

6 3. AHD 408A standby pump control for appended main pumps

3.1 Function

AHD 408A incorporates two controls for each standby-pump, which work independently of each other. The main pumps are driven by the ship’s main engine.

There are three different operational states:

- If the standby pump control is switched off, the relay to activate the contactor relay is shut off (contact open). Pressure and engine speed switch have no influence.

- If the standby pump control is switched on and the engine is either not running or merely idling the standby pump is switched on. During these normal conditions no standby alarm is triggered. If the engine revolutions are increased so that the engine- speed switch reacts, the standby pump stops after a programmable time (t2).

- If there is a fall in pressure at high engine revolutions, the standby pump is activated again after the programmable time t1. Simultaneously, a standby alarm is triggered as follows:

- red LED ‘STANDBY ALARM’ flashes on the front panel - transistor output with same labelling for remote indicator is activated - relay contact for collective alarm opens - relay contact for collective alarm repetition closes for approx. 3s and then reopens

In case of tachogenerator failure, it is possible that the electric standby pump is running, too, despite a high speed and sufficient pressure that is generated by the attached main pump. In order to avoid this, the control has an input Fr, which, if it is activated, monitors the speed sensor n1. If the input Fr is activated and there is no signal from the speed sensor n1, an alarm will be triggered. This means that the LED ‘Speed high’ flashes and the collective alarm relay shuts off. The collective alarm repetition relay closes for approx. 3s and then reopens.

7 E2-e

AHD 408A - Permissible load of relay contacts K1 and K6, 250VAC/3A collective alarm repetition and collective alarm relay 48VDC/AC/1A - In the displayed status, the device is voltageless. All pressures are lower than the point of reaction of the pressure switches. K1 K2 - After switching on the power supply, the collective alarm relay closes. OFF OFF ON ON med. slow med. 5 x 20mm x 5 2 x 0.5A x 2 A B C D 1 2 3 E F G H 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

P1 P2 Fr n1 n2 Coll.alarm repetition Coll. alarm Pump I Pump 2 Pump +24V/0.1A +24V/0.1A 24VDC/AC Monitoring of

St.-by- Alarm St.-by- Alarm rotation speed switch n1 The EEprom (Type 28C64) is located on the upper card of the plug-in unit. If it has to be reprogrammed, it has to be torn out after loosening of the screw in the front panel. (1) Upper half EEprom Content EEprom Content of device address (sec) address (NC/NO) Marking of the t1 0700 ------t2 0701 ------pump circuit Press. switch ------0720 Rot.sp.switch ------0721 St.-by-pump Switch Fr ------0724 St.-by-alarm 1) Pressure or rotation speed at closed contact Content of address = 00 Pressure or rotation speed at open contact Content of address = 01 Monitoring of rotation speed switch for the upper half of the device (n1) by closed switch Fr and content of address 0725 = 01 Content of address = 00 Rot. speed high Überwachung des Drehzahlschalters für die obere Gerätehälfte (n1) durch geöffneten Schalter Fr und Inhalt der Adresse 0725 = 01 Content of address = 01 Press. normal Switch Fr. available? Address Content If yes, content 01, if not, content 00 0725 Marking of the

t1) Time between pressure drop and starting of the st.-by-pump at high rotation speed (alarm, 0-99s). pump circuit t2) Switching-off of the st.-by-pump at running engine after "rotation speed switch off" St.-by-pump and "pressure normal" (0-99s).

(1) Lower half EEprom Content EEprom Content St.-by-alarm of device address (sec) address (NC/NO) t1 0710 ------Rot. speed high t2 0711 ------Press. switch ------0722 Rot.sp.switch ------0723 Press. normal TECHNICAL DATA Power supply : 24VDC/AC Power cons. of the electronics : ca. 0.3A Text field for lettering, cutting Degree of protection - Front : - IP 20 (with front-cap IP 54) out and insertion into the - Rear : - IP 00 front panel from above. Installation depth : 216mm Panel cutout : 138mm x 67mm Weight : ca. 1kg

8 4. AHD 408A-E

Upper part of device

Standby pump control for one electric prelubrification pump and one standby pump each. The main pump is attached to the engine and not affected by the control.

Lower part of device

As AHD 408A, but without transistor output for remote display standby alarm.

4.1 Function

The following description of function only refers to the upper part of the device.

We distinguish between the following states:

- When standby pump control is switched off, the relay controlling the standby pump has shut off (contact open). The control transistors for the prelubrification pump and for ‘switching off unimportant consumers’ can not be activated. Pressure and speed sensors do not have any effect.

- When standby pump control is switched on and engine is not running or idling, the prelubrification pump is activated. This state is normal, so there will be no standby alarm. If the speed is increased so that the engine-speed switch reacts, the prelubrification pump is switched off regardless of the pressure.

- The pressure has to be built up within a programmable time window t2. If that is not the case, a standby alarm will be triggered after time t1. This results in the following:

- The output ‘switch off unimportant consumers’ is activated. Approx. 1s after that the standby pump is activated. In case engine revolutions fall short of idling speed (manual or automatic stop), the speed sensor causes the standby pump to be switched off and the prelubrification pump to be switched on.

- red LED STANDBY ALARM lights up on the front panel - transistor output STANDBY ALARM for remote indicator is activated - collective alarm relay output is deactivated - collective alarm repetition output is activated for approx. 3s and then is deactivated again

9 E2-1-e.mcd

AHD 408AE - Permissible load of relay contacts K1 and K6, 250VAC/3A collective alarm repetition and collective alarm relay 48VDC/AC/1A - In the status displayed here, the device is voltageless All pressures are lower than the point of reaction of the pressure switches. K1 K2 - After switching on of the power supply, the relay switches collective alarm. ON OFF ON OFF med. slow 5 x 20mm 2 x0.5A A B C D 1 2 3 E F G H 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

P1 P2 n1 n2 Coll. alarm repetition Coll.alarm Pump I Pump 2 +24VDC / max 0.1A +24VDC / max 0.1A 24VDC / AC pump Pre-lub.- unimp.cons. The EEprom (Type 27C64) is located on the upper card of the plug- Switch-off in unit. If it has to be reprogrammed, the plug-in unit has to be torn out after loosening the screw in the front panel.

(1) Upper part EEprom Content EEprom Content Marking of the of device address (sec) address (NC/NO) t1 0700 ------pump circuit t2 0708 ------PRE-LUB. OR Press. switch ------0720 Speed switch ------0721 ST.-BY- PUMP

1) Pressure and/or speed at closed contact content of the address = 00 ST.-BY-ALARM Pressure and/or speed at opened contact content of the address = 01 t1) Time between pressure drop and starting of the st.-by-pump at high speed (occurring alarm, 0-99s). SPEED HIGH t2) After reaching high speed, pressure must have developped within this time. PRESSURE Otherwise, there will be a st.-by alarm after elapsing of time t1 (0-99s). NORMAL (1) Lower part EEprom Content EEprom Content Marking of the of device address (sec) address (NC/NO) t1 0710 ------pump circuit t2 0711 ------Press. switch ------0722 ST.-BY- PUMP Speed switch ------0723 ST.-BY-ALARM 1) Pressure and/or speed at closed contact content of the address = 00 Pressure and/or speed at opened contact content of the address = 01 t1) Time between pressure drop and starting of the st.-by-pump at high speed (occurring alarm, 0-99s). SPEED HIGH t2) Switching off of the st.-by-pump at running engine after speed switch off and pressure normal (0-99s). PRESSURE NORMAL TECHNICAL DATA Power supply : 24VDC/AC Consumption of the electronics : app 0.3A Text field for lettering, Degree of protection cutting out and insertion - Front : - IP 20 (with front-cap IP 54) - Rear : - IP 00 from above into the front panel. Installation depth : 216mm Panel cut-out : 138mm x 67mm Weight : app. 1kg

10 5. AHD 408E-K, combined standby pump and compressor control

5.1 Function

AHD 408E-K comprises a standby pump control for electric main pumps and standby pumps and a standby compressor control. Operation is identical to AHD 408E.

The compressor control works as follows:

One selector switch ‘MAIN COMPR’ and one switch ‘ON’ are installed on the front panel of the device. The ‘ON’ switch activates the device. The selector switch determines which compressor shall operate as main compressor.

Control is by means of the following three pressure switches:

P1 low pressure P2 medium pressure P3 high pressure

After the control device is switched on the system checks the condition of the pressure switches. If the pressure is lower than P1 (e. g. on commissioning), the main compressor starts up immediately. If the air pressure required is so high that P3 is not reached the standby compressor is activated. Both compressors switch off when P3 is reached. When both compressors do not succeed in building up pressure P3 after time t3 has elapsed, a status message is issued as follows:

The status message can be cancelled by briefly switching off the ‘ON’-switch.

During normal operation, the main compressor is activated when pressure falls below P2 and after elapsing of time t1 and is deactivated again on reaching P3. In case of a blackout, all compressors cease operating. After restoration of power and elapsing of time t1, the previous state of operation is restored.

11 E3-e.mcd

AHD 408E-K - Permitted load of relay contacts K1 to K5, 250VAC/3A collective alarm repetition and collective alarm relay

48VDC/AC/1A K1 K4 - In the status displayed here, the device is voltageless. All pressures are lower than the point of reaction of the pressure switches.

K2 K5 - After switching on of the power supply, the relay Comp. 2 = main comp., comp.1 = St.-by-comp. Comp.1 = main comp., comp. 2 = St.-by-comp. Pp 2 = main pp., pp 1 = St.-by-pp = 1 pp pp., main = 2 Pp St.-by-pp = 2 pp pp., main = 1 Pp switches collective alarm. EIN AUS EIN AUS

K3 medium slow medium 5 x 20mm x 5 2 x 0.5A x 2 A B C D 1 2 3 E F G H 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

P Pl1 Pl3 Collect. alarm repetition Collect. alarm Pump 1 Pump Pump 2 Pump +24V/0.1A +24V/0.1A Pl2 Compressor 1 Compressor 2 Compressor 24VDC/AC St.-by- Alarm St.-by- Alarm Black-out The EEprom (Type 28C64) is located on the upper card of the plug- in unit. If it has to be reprogrammed, the plug-in unit has to be torn out medium air-press. medium lower air-pressure lower after loosening the screw in the front panel. air-pressure higher Marking of the Upper part EEprom Content EEprom Content of device address (min) address (sec) pump circuit t1 0700 0701 t2 ------0702 t3 ------0703 Main pump

1) Pressure at closed contact content of the address = 0 St.-by-pump Pressure at open contact content of the address = 01 t1) Permitted time from switching on the st.-by-pump until reaching operating pressure during the start program. This time is the same as the time that is available for the St.-by-alarm operating pump after a black-out to redevelop the pressure (0-99min and 59s) . t2) Time between pressure drop and stopping of the main pump (0-99s) Pressure t3) Time until restarting of the operating pump after a black-out (0-99s). normal Compressor- (1) Compressor- EEprom Content EEprom Content EEprom Content control control address (min) address (sec) address (NC/NO) Text field for labelling, Main- t1 ------0710 ------cutting out and inserting t2 ------0711 ------from above into the front compressor panel. t3 0712 0713 ------St.-by- Press. switch 1 ------0717 compressor Press. switch 2 ------0718 Press. switch 3 ------0719 St.-by-alarm

NO = Pressure > Switch pressure when contact open; content of the address = 00 NC = Pressure > Switch pressure when contact closed; content of the address = 01 Pressure >p2 t1 = Time from p < p2 until starting of main compressor (0-99s). TECHNICAL DATA It is equal to the time that has to pass after a black-out, before the main compressor is switched on again. Power supply : 24VDC/AC Consumption of the electronics : app. 0.3A t2 = Time from p < p1 until starting of st.-by-compressor (0-99s). Degree of protection - Front : - IP 20 (with front-cap IP 54) t3 = Permissible time of operation of the st.-by- compressor until a - Rear : - IP 00 St.-by-alarm is released, as far as p is < p2 (0-99min and 59s) Installation depth : 216mm Panel cutout : 138mm x 67mm Weight : app. 1kg

19 20 21 22 23 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 408zk-E.MCD ALL PUMP- COMPRESSOR- AND AHDSERIES 408 DIMENSIONALDRAWING FOR CONTROLSOF THE Drawing: 408ZK-E.mcd Drawing: 216 200 15 67 Panel cut-out

2 2 1 R E S E T 1 R E S E T

T E S T 138 P U P U P P M M O N O N I I M A M A N N AHD 408E AHD 72 Main Pump Main St.-By-Pump St.-By-Alarm normal Press. HT- HT- COOL.- WATER Pump Main St.-By-Pump St.-By-Alarm normal Press. NT- COOL.- WATER

BLACK - OUT - BLACK SYSTEM FAULT 144

13 D5-e

A B C D 1 2 3 E F G H 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Collective alarm Collective Collective alarm repetition alarm Collective

A B C D 1 2 3 E F G H 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Collective alarm Collective

Floating contact for connection repetition alarm Collective with failure report system

Collective report for the failure report system

It is possible to lead the collective reports of an arbitrary amount of devices of the AHD 408 series onto a single measuring point of the failure report system. In order to do this, the collective report outputs are switched in line and all collective alarm repetition outputs are switched parallel. Both signals are then switched parallel again and led to the failure report system as floating contact.

The collective alarm contacts open in the event of a st.-by-alarm. The collective alarm repetition contacts close for approximately 3s. Thus, the measuring point in the failure report system is shortly reset and then activated again.

Thus it is ensured that every alarm leads to repeated addressing of the failure report system, even if it had already been activated by the report of a different device.

In this example, three devices are connected this way.

14 E222-e

AHD 408A AHD 408E AHD 408E-K

Marking of the pump circuit St.-by-pump Main pump Main pump

St.-by-alarm St.-by-pump St.-by-pump

Speed high St.-by-alarm St.-by-alarm

Press. normal Press. normal Press. normal Marking of the Compressor pump circuit control Main St.-by-pump Main pump compressor St.-by-alarm St.-by- St.-by-pump compressor Speed high St.-by-alarm St.-by-alarm Press. normal Press. normal Press. >p2 Text fields for marking, for fields Text from above into the front the into above from cutting out and insertion and out cutting panel.

15 Binary Data Station PS 47-1-15

PS47-1-15 englisch.doc

1. Application

The binary data station accommodates up to 15 digital signals such as mechanical contacts, transistor outputs and other switches by means of optocouplers. The electronics transform the data into a serial output signal and transmit it via a single connection by means of an optocoupler (in case of galvanic seperation from the receiver via a dual connection).

By using PS 47-1-15 it is possible to reduce the amount of electrical connections from a max. 32 down to just 3 (incl. power supply), transmit the signals over a distance of up to 1,000 m and from that point distribute them to one or more receiver or analyzing units. Furthermore, it replaces the intermediate terminal block which the sensors are usually connected to. In case of simultaneous application of data distributor AHD W (Version A), decentralized failure report systems can be realized with minimized wiring.

The inputs can be wired single or double pole. No external terminals are required for this.

- low power consumption (65 mA) - compact and robust construction - easy mounting on rails - plug-in terminal blocks - GL classification

47-1-15e.mcd PS 47-1-15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

+ - NC/NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Inputno. : serial output 24VDC±25%

3. Dimensional drawing

111

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 55

mountable on rail TS 32 and TS 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 32 31 30 29 28 92 20 21 22 23 24 23 27212620 25 22

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Terminalplug-in terminal blocks areblocks plugable 4. Technical data

Power supply: 24VDC +/-25% Power consumption: approx. 65mA Inputs: 15 optocoupler inputs Outputs: 1 x serial via optocouplers Data format: 1 start bit (high), 15 data bits in same order as the 15 inputs, high for closed contact, low for open contact, 16 bit low Perm. relative air humidity: 99% Perm. ambient humidity: 0-70°C Weight: 0.2kg 5. Wiring possibilities of inputs

47-115Le.mcd

PS 47-1-15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

NC/NO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Input no.: Input

(-)(-) (+) 1 2 3 4 5

Example 1 Registration of 3 binary contacts with mutual refeeding.

Example 2 Registration of 3 binary contacts with mutual minus-connection. Every second terminal of one input remains idle.

Example 3 Registration of 2 transistors with mutual minus- connection (such sensors are wired like contacts). Every second terminal of one input remains idle.

Example 4 Registration of 2 contacts with 2-pole connection.

Example 5 Registration of 3 contacts that switch plus-potential. Here, the inputs are bypassed, in order to cause a potential alternation at switching of the contacts in the binary data station. 6. Measuring point list Must35e Substation-no. U...... DATE: ...... REMARKS

LED-color in Alarmsystem

(red, yellow,(red, green) Print ? Print

(Chamb.) (Chamb.)

Group Group

(Bridge) (Bridge) Group Group e.g. 38 Meas.point no. of of dest.system e.g. EDA no.2 Client Newb. Shipyard Dest.syst. Display? 1 to 5 possible (also multiple) bydest. system Suppression Meas.point no. DATA FORTHE ALARMSYSTEM On On (1-99s) Off (1-99s) Delaytime Delaytime other Contact(NO) Kindinput of (pleasemark applying) (Opener) (Closer) Contact(NC) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MEASURINGPOINT LIST FOR BINARY STATION PS 47-1-15 Input no.Input points measuring of Marking Binary data station PS 47-1 Parallel-serial transformer with 47 optocoupler inputs, with serial output for minimization of wiring

12 PS47-1 englisch.doc

1. Application

By using PS 47-1-15 it is possible to reduce the amount of electrical connections from a max. 94 down to just 3 (incl. power supply), transmit the signals over a distance of up to 1,000 m and from that point distribute them to one or more receiver or analyzing units. Furthermore, it replaces the intermediate terminal block which the sensors are usually connected to.

The following devices (e.g. see catalog) can be used as receiver and analyzing units:

- Display and alarm system KOMPAKT EDA 47 - Serial-parallel transformer AHD 412 - Group panel AHD 406H - Data distributor AHD W (version B)

The inputs can be wired single or double pole. No external terminals are required for this. GL classification

PS471m2e.mcd

Binary Data Station PS 47-1

FUNCTION: PS 47-1 transforms the activated inputs of the terminal block into a serial output signal and transmits the data to terminal 49 via an optocoupler.

BZX DATA FORMAT: Startbit (high), 47 data bits corresponding to terminals 1-47 33 (high at closed and low at open contact), 80 low-bits, Baudrate: 1200 560Ohm The input terminal numbers are assigned to the measuring point numbers of

the KOMPAKT EDA 47 devices. 0.5Amt 2 x

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

NC/NO internal + - connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 24VDC±25% serial serial output 3. Dimensional Drawing

PS471mae.mcd

electronic card (pluggable) post with View "A" guide rail PS 47-1 48-pole terminal block with series resistors for discoupling of the contacts. In case of single polar connection, it stays idle. In the shown example, terminal 48 is the mutual reference terminal = supply-minus

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 View "A"

198 33 210 97

4. Technical Data

Power supply: 24VDC +/- 25% Power consumption: approx. 120 mA Inputs: 47 optocoupler inputs Outputs: 1 x serial via optocouplers Data format: 1 start bit (high), 47 data bits in same order as the 47 inputs, high for closed contact, low for open contact, 80 bit low Perm. relative air humidity: 99% Perm. ambient humidity: 0-70°C Weight: approx. 1 kg kombeise.mcd EXAMPLE OF USE

Alarm- and Display Unit KOMPAKT EDA 47 20-pole transfer station

2k2 Plug-in connection DIN 41651

In the standard edition, the integrated series resistors have INTERNAL a value of 2k2. Therefore, a current of appr. 10mA is flowing through the LED during interconnected output. Then, the output is short-circuit-proof and the LED does not need an 24VDC additional external series resistor. 48x 2k2Ohm Generally, an output can be charged with up to 100 mA ribbon cable (but all together max. 2.5A). In this case, bridges are in-

Plug-inconnection DIN 41651 stalled instead of the series resistors. Then, the outputs 20-pole ribboncable 2k2 are not short-circuit-proof anymore. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

+ - 50-pole ribboncable Plug-inconnection DIN 41651

2 x PTC 1,5A 24VDC±25%

- Supply serial input 1 1 input serial 2 input serial

+ 24VDC±25% - + Transfer Station Plug-in connection DIN 41651 -

+ test Lamp - horn Ackn. optics Ackn. + - + 51525354555657585960

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

Terminal no. corresponds to output no. and input term. no. of PS 47-1 (except terminal 48).

Failure data transmission

Function Photo resistor (optional) K11.doc The inputs at the binary data station PS47-1 are transformed into a serial output signal and transferred to the KOMPAKT EDA 47. This device registers and evaluates the data corresponding to their individual programming (see programming list). The following parameters of each measuring point (terminal no. at PS 47-1 = terminal no. at KOMPAKT EDA 47) can be programmed: Display or alarm, switch-on and/or switch-off delay between 1 and 99 seconds, activated (blocked) by measuring point 1, 2, 3, 4 or/and 5, report as shutter (NO) or opener (NC), and/or with rising or falling analog signal.

In this example, both devices (PS47-1 and KOMPAKT EDA 47) must have a mutual power supply, or, in case of two sources, with mutual ground connection. For galvanically separated systems, the serial connection must be bipolar.

The input circuits do not have to be, as shown in the example, bipolar. In case of unipolar connection, the 48-pole terminal block remains idle. The mutual reference terminal is then connected with supply-minus. Mixed connections are also permitted. Besides mechanical switches, also transistor outputs, as they are often found in level- or proximity switches, can be used as input circuits. The cable for serial data transmission can be up to 1,000 meters long. In case there are stronger magnetic fields in the vicinity, the cable must be screened. Unused wires in the cable must be connected with supply-minus on both ends. The minimum diameter is 0.75mm².

Input Unit, Binary Data Station PS 47-1 (catalog cat. 12) FUNCTION: PS 47-1 takes the activated inputs at the terminal block and transforms them into a serial output signal and transmits the data, via an optocoupler, to terminal 49. BZX DATA FORMAT: start bit (high), 47 data bits corresponding to terminals 1 - 47 33 (high at closed and low at open contact), 80 low-bits, Baudrate: 1200 560Ohm The input terminal numbers are assigned to the measuring point numbers of the

AHD 412 devices. 0.5Amt x 2

60-pole terminal block 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

NC/NO internal + - connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 24VDC±25% 48-pole terminal block RA1-2-e.mcd EXAMPLE OF USE FOR REMOTE DATA TRANSMISSION

Output Unit AHD 412

- + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + S+ S+ SIN1 SIN2 SOT2 K1 For supply of the device, and thus + + + for the consumers, a controlled Consumers Relay normally closed; it (e.g. magnet- opens in case of power power supply unit or battery are valves) failure or system failure. not required. A transformer with SIN1 SIN2 SOT2 downstream with rectifier (not 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 - - - - - K1 part of delivery) are sufficient. 24VDC+/-25%

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Consumers (e.g. contactors)

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

Perm. current per output is 1.5A, but a total of 50A. All outputs are individually short-circuit proof and thermically protected.

Function 1000m max The inputs at binary data station PS47-1 are transformed into a serial output signal and transmitted to the output unit AHD 412. AHD 412 then transforms the serial signal into parallel outputs. Therefore, if, the input at terminal 16 is closed, also the output at terminal 16 connects through.

Unlike shown in the example, the input circuits do not have to be done bipolar. In case of unipolar connection, the 48-pole terminal block remains unused. The mutual reference terminal is then connected with supply-minus. Mixed connections are also permitted. Besides mechanical switches, transistor outputs, as they are often found in level- or proximity-switches, can also be used as input circuits.

The cable for serial data transfer can be up to 1,000 meters long. In case there are strong magnetic fields in the vicinity, the wires must be twisted and commonly screened. The minimum diameter must be 0.75mm²

Input Unit, Binary Data Station PS 47-1(catalog cat. 12)

FUNCTION: PS 47-1 takes the activated inputs at the terminal block and transforms them into a serial output signal and transmits the data, via an optocoupler, to terminal 49. DATA FORMAT: start bit (high), 47 data bits corresponding to terminals 1 - 47 BZX (high at closed and low at open contact), 80 low-bits, 33 Baudrate: 1200 The input terminal numbers are assigned to the measuring point numbers of the 560Ohm AHD 412 devices. 2 x 0.5Amt x 2

60-pole terminal block 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

NC/NO internal + - connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 24VDC±25% 48-pole terminal block Analogue data station AHD 903-15 with relay unit AHD 903R

Terminal block

Electronic unit with processor system

Relay unit AHD 903R

- analogue precision data station with 12-bit resolution - 15 analogue inputs for Pt 100, Pt 1000, 0 (4) - 20 mA, 0 (2) - 10 V, binary, other kinds on request - 1 serial bi-directional interface - 1 serial output for direct connection with the Kompakt EDA 47 alarm system or data distributor AHD W - up to 16 devices can be connected with the LDC monitor AHD 524 via a 2-wire bus- system (plus power supply), see catalogue Section 6. - mountable on rails (TS 32, TS 35) - type approved by ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LR

1. Introduction

AHD 903-15 is a microprocessor controlled device that is mainly used for decentralized data registration. Because the systems can be individually addressed it is possible to connect up to 16 data stations (240 inputs), spatially separated via a bus with 4 connections (incl. power supply). The LCD-Monitor AHD524 calls up the stations one after the other and displays the data in graphical or tabular form on different pages. Due to a large amount of software variations the following problems can be addressed:

- general analogue and binary data registration with alarm function - exhaust-gas average temperature monitoring for diesel engines - tank content levels for tanks of all shapes - earth contact monitoring of electric engines

2. Assembly

AHD 903-15 consists of an electronic card that is inserted in a housing for rail installation. It is connected with a 40-pole transfer unit via ribbon cable for connection of all inputs and outputs as well as of the power supply.

The device passed a vibration test of 4 G during the classification procedure and is thus also approved for direct installation into terminal boxes and diesel engines.

3. Data collection

Up to 15 measuring sensors can be connected 1- or 2-poled to one analogue data station. The recorded values are normed internally, converted and transmitted to the display unit AHD 524 as numeric values. Furthermore, upper and lower limit values can be programmed. An alarm is triggered in the event the measured values are out of this range. These limit values are available serially at a dedicated data output (terminal 4). From there, they can be transmitted to, e.g., a monitoring device which triggers an in the event the measured values are out of range.

In case the system is linked to display unit AHD 524, it receives data requests or configuration parameters via a bi-directional bus connection, whereby multiple data stations are called up by different addresses. The data are sent back to the display unit AHD 524 via the same connection.

In addition to a monitoring circuit, the microprocessor-controlled system contains a special memory chip for permanent storage of configuration data (limit values, input mode, range limits, etc.). The collection of measured values is carried out by a 12-bit A/D converter system. An integrated reference compensation, as well as signal filtering at the inputs, enables extremely accurate measuring results. The following inputs can be processed:

0...10V/1...10V 0...20mA/4...20mA PT100 PT1000 binary units

Others on request

A relay station (AHD 903R) with four relays can be connected via ribbon cable. In the event of a limit value being reached, the relay belonging to the corresponding group of inputs is activated. Each input can be freely assigned to one of these four groups. The relays can be programmed as initial-value or new-value indicators and either as NO or NC.

The basis for configuration and programming ex-works is the measuring point list filled in by the customer.

More detailed documentation for this device can be provided on request. DIMENSIONAL DRAWING 903-1-b.mcd

40-pole terminal block Analog data station AHD 903-15 Relay unit AHD 903R (optional) 113 146 68

Ribbon cable Ribbon cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 4 6 8 10 12 1416 1820 22 24 2628 30 32 3436 38 40 58 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1517 1921 23 25 2729 31 33 3537 39 56 56

mountable on rail TS 32 and TS 35

Plug-in connection with strain relief, acc. to DIN 41651

Ribbon cable 78 78 115 Type AHD 903-15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 Power supply 24VDC Device No. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 System address

TERMINAL DIAGRAM

Ribbon cable

AHD 903-15

2 x 0.632 Amtr AHD 903R

K1 K2 K3 K4

Flachbandkabel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 + -

% Input no.

2 serial transmission to display AHD 524

serial reception from display AHD 524

alarm system alarm

LED-Color in in LED-Colorthe (red,yellow, green) Print ? Print

(Chamber) (Chamber)

Group Group

(Bridge) (Bridge) Group Group e. g. 38 Analogue station ...... Substation-no.U...... Date: ...... Meas.Point no. Meas.Point of dest. of system dest. e.g. EDA Nr.2 dest.system Group Group relay 1to 5 possible (also multiple) DATA FOR ALARM THE SYSTEM by input of of inputthisby system dest. by Suppression Suppression U-station no. meas.point Delay relay Group in thein essedby any other. Delay Delay On (1-999s) On(1-999s) (1-999s) Off k4) (k1 - Newbuilding Client Shipyard (falling sign.)(falling (rising sign.) Lim. value minLim. value value max Lim. or on- Unit analogue station, eachmeasuring point canbe suppr Independent of suppressions in the COMPACTEDA 47, Measuring range Measuring other (Closer) Contact (NO) Contact (Operner) Contact (NC) Contact 1 1 0-20mA 4-20mA (please mark applying) (please mark 1 voltage-output-signal, whether has2,it a 3 or 4-c Please mark,in case of transformerswith current- ductor technic. 1-10V 1 1 0-10V INPUT MODE Pt100 Pt1000 K3 ery) K2 K1 K4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ANALOGUESTATION AHD903-15 MEASURING POINT LIST FOR First indicatorvalue New indicatorvalue Contactnormally open Contactnormally closed GROUP RELAY DEFINITION Input no. Marking of measuringpoint (Only ifgroup relay unit AHD 903R is partof deliv DATA DISTRIBUTOR AHD W (Version A)

The data distributor is used, e.g., in decentralized fault report systems for collection of serial data from substations. It is also used in ballast-pumping systems on ships where limit switch positions are monitored, or magnetic valves have to be addressed.

The device can deal with 270 reports from 18 data stations or AHD 414/AHD 414A (contacts, analogue limit values or status information), sort them in a programmable way and transmit them via serial bus to as many as 8 alarm systems Type KOMPAKT EDA 47. Each single report can be assigned to any one of 376 destination devices. Serial communication is indicated by LEDs at the inputs and outputs. The considerable cost savings due to minimization of wiring frequently exceed the price of the devices.

- pluggable terminal blocks - mountable on rails TS32 or TS35 - GL classification

CONTENTS PAGE

1. Introduction 3 2 Function 3

Dimensional drawing 6 Technical data 6 Terminal diagram 7 Programming table 8

Specimen case graphic 9

2 1. Introduction

AHD W (Version A) is a microprocessor-controlled device for collection of serial data and freely programmable distribution via serial bus. The device incorporates an electronic card that is installed in a rail-mounted housing (TS32 or TS35). All inputs and outputs are led to two pluggable terminal blocks.

There is an EEprom 28C64 on the electronic card that contains a system program and free memory space for project-specific programming. It can be removed (power switched off) and programmed according to the programming table on page 8. We recommend our portable programming device S4.

2. Function

AHD W (A) has 19 power-controlled serial optocoupler inputs and 10 serial transistor outputs. At the inputs 1 to 18, it can receive the 15 inputs of one substation PS 47-1-15, or status reports (reached analog limiting values) of the Aanalog Data Station AHD 903-15 by means of a single wire each. Other devices, e.g. the Diesel-Start-Stop-Automatic AHD 414 or the Safety and Alarm System AHD 414A, can also be linked up. Attached to this handbook there is a drawing of decentralized failure report system, where the function of the data distributor is described.

Further details of the above mentioned input devices can be found in the specifications of:

Binary Data Station: PS 47-1-15 Analog Data Station: AHD 903-15 Diesel-Start-Stop-Automatic: AHD 414 Safety System: AHD 414A

Data registration is carried out according to the following drawing:

Serial data collection zwwa-e.mcd

Start bit 15 data bits correspond to input 1 to 15, or to limiting values of analog pause length 16 to 200 bits (high) data station AHD 903-15 (high, if measuring point is activated). (low)

Data rate is 1200 baud.

Thus, the data distributor can log up to 18 x 15 = 270 inputs. In case of failure of the serial data transmission, the data distributor activates the ‘16 th input‘. Monitoring of the substations is also carried out by the data distributor. All inputs, including the information ‘Data Failure‘, can be arbitrarily assigned to the 8 serial outputs. The serial output signal is as follows:

serial data output zwwa-e.mcd

Start bit 47 data bits serial output (high) approx. 250 bits (low)

Data rate is 1200 baud.

3 With the programming table on page 8, all input bits can be assigned to all output bits. Thus, there are 8 x 47 = 376 destinations available for the 270 input bits, as well as for the 18 bits for ‘Data Failure‘. There are also 270 additional input bits available for ‘Sensor Failure‘, in the event that analogue data stations AHD 903-15 are connected as entry devices. The programming tables of the data distributor contain information about its mode of input:

Input mode 00 serial input is vacant Input mode 01 Binary data station PS 47-1-15, analogue data station AHD 903-15 without sensor failure monitoring, Diesel start automatic AHD 414, safety and alarm system AHD 414A Input mode 02 Analogue data station AHD 903-15 with sensor failure monitoring

Thus, data distributor AHD W (Version A) enables decentralized logging of data and can considerably reduce wiring and the related expenses. At the same time, an input does not have a fixed, but an arbitrarily programmable output. Possible destination systems are, e.g., the alarm and display system KOMPAKT EDA 47 or the module AHD 412 that can be used e.g. for direct activation of magnetic valves.

Thus, by means of the programming table the user can specify that, e.g., substation no. 5 (connected to terminal no. 5 on the data distributor) is to address measuring point no. 32 of the KOMPAKT EDA 47 device that is connected to the serial output no. 4. An ‘Or-Operation‘ is made possible by multiple addressing of an output. That means that if the measuring point input in the destination system is programmed to be connected to a ‘NO‘ switch (closer), it can be activated from different points. If it is to function as a ‘NC‘ switch (opener), it can only be activated when no other relevant output-bit is received from substations.

In case fewer than 18 substations are connected up, some serial inputs will be left unoccupied. These can subsequently be switched parallel to connected inputs. Thus, a multiple use of the same inputs for different destinations is possible.

Sensor failure

As described above, the data distributor can also log and analyze sensor failures at the inputs of the analogue data station. Each sensor failure can be allocated to any one of the 376 destinations. At the same time the original destination assigned to this input will be activated.

Example:

Input no. 5 of the analogue data station AHD 903-15 that is connected to serial input no. 12, is programmed in a way that it addresses the 36 th bit of serial output no. 4. At the same time, in case of sensor failure, the 28 th bit of serial output no. 7 should also be activated.

Programming according to the table on page 5

EEprom-Address Content 1168 04 1169 36 1468 07 1469 28

160B 02 (mode of input)

4 Usually, the 28 th bit (in this example) of serial output no. 7 functions as collective report. Therefore, it is deleted for approx. 2 s following each sensor failure before being reset. An alarm that has already been acknowledged but is still active, extinguishes and is then reactivated (collective alarm repetition).

Programming table for serial input no.12 (see page 9 of Input chann. no. 12 = terminal no. Content this description). The address 160B has the content 02 Type of input in address 160B ...... for the respective mode of input (analogue data station Active Sensor- AHD 903-15 with sensor failure monitoring). report failure

Input Address Address Target system Target system Measur. point no. Measur. point no. 1 1160 1460 2 1162 1462 3 1164 1464 4 1166 1466 5 1168 1468 6 116A 146A 7 116C 146C 8 116E 146E 9 1170 1470 10 1172 1472 11 1174 1474 12 1176 1476 13 1178 1478 14 117A 147A 15 117C 147C (16) 117E -----

Failure substation

In case of failure of a substation, wire break or interruption of the power supply to a substation, all serial data is also interrupted. As result of this the data distributor sets the ‘16 th ‘ input bit that can also be assigned arbitrarily programmable to all serial outputs

5 DIMENSIONAL DRAWING

13 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 1921 2325 27 29 31 33 wa-e.mcd plugable terminal block 64 BÖNING Power AHDW 24VDC A ACHTUNG: Vor Entnahme des EEproms CAUTION: Switch-offpower supply before Versorgungsspannung ausschalten! removing the EEprom! 195 in 18 Typ Type Spannung Powersupply Geräte-Nr. Device-no. Version in 1in 3in 5in 7in 9 in 2 in 11 in 4 in 13 in 6 in 15 in 8 in 17 in 10 in 12 in 14 in 16 1 out 2 out 3 out 4 out 5 out 6 out 7 out 8 out

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

X1 X2 122

6 waa-e.mcd TECHNICAL DATA Power supply : 24 VDC +/- 25 % Power consumpt. of the electronics : app. 0.2 A Degree of protection : IP 00 Weight : 0.7kg Inputs/Outputs : 19 x serial input 10 x serial output Baud rate : 1200 Baud (or on request)

Terminal diagram

AHD W (A)

8 serial 0.63Amtr outputs 18 serial inputs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

+ - serial input 1 input serial 2 input serial 3 input serial 4 input serial 5 input serial 6 input serial 7 input serial 8 input serial 9 input serial 10 input serial 11 input serial 12 input serial 13 input serial 14 input serial 15 input serial 16 input serial 17 input serial 18 input serial 1 output serial 2 output serial 3 output serial 4 output serial 5 output serial 6 output serial 7 output serial 8 output serial optional optional optional Supply 24VDC +/-25% 24VDC Supply

7 wa4-e.mcd Programming Chart for Data Distributor AHD W (A) Type of input: 00 = input idle 01 = Binary Station PS 47-1-15, Analog Station AHD 903-15 without sensor failure super- Client: Yard: Newbuilding: vision, alarm-/safety-system AHD 414A or Diesel-Start-Automatic AHD 414 02 = Analog Station AHD 903-15 with sensor Com.-no.: 4- Last update: failure supervision

Input-(16) is created internally in case of "Failure Data Station".

point no. point point no. point point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system system

Target Target ...... Target ...... failure Sensor- failure Sensor- Content failure Sensor- Content Content ------

13A2 1462 1522 13A4 1464 1524 13A6 1466 1526 13A8 1468 1528 13AA 146A 152A 13AC 146C 152C 13AE 146E 152E 13B0 1470 1530 13B2 1472 1532 13B4 1474 1534 13B6 1476 1536 13B8 1478 1538 13BA 147A 153A 13BC 147C 153C 13A0 1460 1520

Address Address

Address point no. point point no. point point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system

system

Target Target Target report Active report Active report Active 10A2 1162 1222 10A4 1164 1224 10A6 1166 1226 10A8 1168 1228 10AA 116A 122A 10AC 116C 122C 10AE 116E 122E 10B0 1170 1230 10B2 1172 1232 10B4 1174 1234 10B6 1176 1236 10B8 1178 1238 10BA 117A 123A 10BC 117C 123C 10BE 117E 123E 10A0 1160 1220 Address Address Address

Type of input inaddress 1611 Type of input inaddress 1605 Type inputof in address160B Input chann.no. 18 = terminal no. Input chann. no.6 terminal= no. 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15 (16) (16) (16) Input 1 1 1 Input Input chann. no.12 = terminal no. Input

point no. point point no. point point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system system

...... Target ...... Target ...... Target failure Sensor- Content failure Sensor- failure Sensor- Content Content ------

1382 1442 1502 1384 1444 1504 1386 1446 1506 1388 1448 1508 138A 144A 150A 138C 144C 150C 138E 144E 150E 1390 1450 1510 1392 1452 1512 1394 1454 1514 1396 1456 1516 1398 1458 1518 139A 145A 151A 139C 145C 151C 1380 1440 1500

Address

Address point no. point point no. point

point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system

system

Target Target Target report Active report Active report Active naddress 1604 1082 1142 1202 1084 1144 1204 1086 1146 1206 1088 1148 1208 108A 114A 120A 108C 114C 120C 108E 114E 120E 1090 1150 1210 1092 1152 1212 1094 1154 1214 1096 1156 1216 1098 1158 1218 109A 115A 121A 109C 115C 121C 109E 115E 121E 1080 1140 1200 Address Address Address ut chann.no. 5= terminal no.

Type of input inaddress 1610

Type ofinput in address160A Input chann.no. 17 = terminal no. Input 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15 (16) (16) (16) 1 1 1 Input chann. no.11 = terminal no. Input Input

point no. point point no. point point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system system

...... Target Target ...... Target ...... failure Sensor- Content failure failure Sensor- Sensor- Content Content ------

1362 1422 14E2 1364 1424 14E4 1366 1426 14E6 1368 1428 14E8 136A 142A 14EA 136C 142C 14EC 136E 142E 14EE 1370 1430 14F0 1372 1432 14F2 1374 1434 14F4 1376 1436 14F6 1378 1438 14F8 137A 143A 14FA 137C 143C 14FC 1360 1420 14E0

Address

Address Address point no. point point no. point point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system system

Target Target Target report Active report report Active Active 1062 1122 11E2 1064 1124 11E4 1066 1126 11E6 1068 1128 11E8 106A 112A 11EA 106C 112C 11EC 106E 112E 11EE 1070 1130 11F0 1072 1132 11F2 1074 1134 11F4 1076 1136 11F6 1078 1138 11F8 107A 113A 11FA 107C 113C 11FC 107E 113E 11FE 1060 1120 11E0 Address Address Address

Type of input in address 160F Type of input inaddress 1609 Input chann. no. 16 terminal= no. 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15 (16) (16) (16) 1 1 1 Input Input chann.no. 10 = terminal no. Input Input

point no. point point no. point point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system system

...... Target Target ...... Target ...... failure Sensor- Content failure failure Sensor- Sensor- Content Content ------

1342 1402 14C2 1344 1404 14C4 1346 1406 14C6 1348 1408 14C8 134A 140A 14CA 134C 140C 14CC 134E 140E 14CE 1350 1410 14C0 1352 1412 14D2 1354 1414 14D4 1356 1416 14D6 1358 1418 14D8 135A 141A 14DA 135C 141C 14DC 1340 1400 14C0

Address

Address Address point no. point point no. point point no. point

ss 1602ss Type of input inaddress 1603 Type of input i Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system

= terminalno. Input chann.no. 4= terminalno. Inp system

Target Target Target report Active report report Active Active 1042 1102 11C2 1044 1104 11C4 1046 1106 11C6 1048 1108 11C8 104A 110A 11CA 104C 110C 11CC 104E 110E 11CE 1050 1110 11D0 1052 1112 11D2 1054 1114 11D4 1056 1116 11D6 1058 1118 11D8 105A 111A 11DA 105C 111C 11DC 105E 111E 11DE 1040 1100 11C0 Address Address Address

Type inputof in address160E Type of input inaddress 1608 Input chann. no.15 terminal= no. Input 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 Input chann.no. 9= terminalno. 15 15 15 (16) (16) (16) 1 1 1 Input Input

point no. point point no. point point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system system

Target Target ...... Target ...... failure Sensor- failure Sensor- Content failure Sensor- Content Content ------

1322 13E2 14A2 1324 13E4 14A4 1326 13E6 14A6 1328 13E8 14A8 132A 13EA 14AA 132C 13EC 14AC 132E 13EE 14AE 1330 13F0 14B0 1332 13F2 14B2 1334 13F4 14B4 1336 13F6 14B6 1338 13F8 14B8 133A 13FA 14BA 133C 13FC 14BC 1320 13E0 14A0

Address

Address point no. point point no. point point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system

system

Target Target Target report Active report Active report Active 1022 10E2 11A2 1024 10E4 11A4 1026 10E6 11A6 1028 10E8 11A8 102A 10EA 11AA 102C 10EC 11AC 102E 10EE 11AE 1030 10F0 11B0 1032 10F2 11B2 1034 10F4 11B4 1036 10F6 11B6 1038 10F8 11B8 103A 10FA 11BA 103C 10FC 11BC 103E 10FE 11BE 1020 10E0 11A0 Address Address Address

Type of input inaddress 160D Type of input in address1601 Type of input inaddre Type input of in address1607 Input chann.no. 14 terminal= no. Input 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15 Input chann. no.2= terminal no. Input chann.no. 3 (16) (16) (16) 1 1 1 Input Input chann. no.8 terminal= no. Input

point no. point point no. point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system system

...... Target Target ...... Target ...... failure Sensor- Content failure failure Sensor- Sensor- Content Content ------

1302 13C2 1482 1304 13C4 1484 1306 13C6 1486 1308 13C8 1488 130A 13CA 148A 130C 13CC 148C 130E 13CE 148E 1310 13D0 1490 1312 13D2 1492 1314 13D4 1494 1316 13D6 1496 1318 13D8 1498 131A 13DA 149A 131C 13DC 149C 1300 13C0 1480

Address

Address Address point no. point point no. point no. point

Measur. Measur. Measur.

system system system

Target Target Target report Active report report Active Active 1002 10C2 1182 1004 10C4 1184 1006 10C6 1186 1008 10C8 1188 100A 10CA 118A 100C 10CC 118C 100E 10CE 118E 1010 10D0 1190 1012 10D2 1192 1014 10D4 1194 1016 10D6 1196 1018 10D8 1198 101A 10DA 119A 101C 10DC 119C 101E 10DE 119E 1000 10C0 1180 Address Address Address Type of input inaddress 160C Type ofinput inaddress 1600 Type ofinput inaddress 1606 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15 (16) (16) (16) Input chann. no.13 = terminal no. 1 1 1 Input Input chann.no. 1= terminalno. Input chann.no. 7= terminalno. Input Input

8 DECENTRALIZED DATA REGISTRATION AND DISPLAY wa-22-e.mcd Failure Data- Failure Data- Failure Data- Failure transm.(PS 47-1) transm.(PS transm.(PS 47-1) transm.(PS transm.(PS 47-1) transm.(PS 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 35 39 43 47 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 35 39 43 47 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 35 39 43 47 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 34 38 42 46 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 34 38 42 46 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 34 38 42 46 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 37 41 45 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 37 41 45 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 37 41 45 measuringpoints as possible targets 8 8 KOMPAKTEDA 47 with a total of 376 1 wire

d able the

t e

l e

s c

c o u

a c

l t

a k d

c f r o

e BÖNING

a i o .

p e

l r e

n t o s n r e

t m 1

v t

g f e

e a

i s h s

d i i s

x t

m e c

s f

k s

t A R s n

u d

t o h

e i

t c e

d e

u o

a e C

s u r i

l r

l o

e e i t

p i g

e l

d g e

n a

t a E r

n i a

n Power

c b w

t i l

i o

u h n

y v l l

l i s

i u

r t a

n y

i b e

I a

g d l g r t

a a

l m

h a t d

. n s

e b a

n n

i r

i i

i c

i e r

y S e o

w t s n

l a r

r l

i t t i

n i

e b

a ,

a r r

t m . e

e r

s A a

a i

e e

m ,

r l e

c a

r a g

f t

i c o l

e n s l

u r b

o D d

o i l d

t n

d n

q e a

o e

i a e

s o t

t g

u e f t

i e c

e .

s h

u t

r e

r t

n p AHD W 24VDC A

n r o i

b o

i l c n

i n s

a b

a e

a a

r t

a a o

r ) e o m

) d U i

t .

ACHTUNG:Vor Entnahme des EEproms CAUTION:Switch-off powersupply before n r

l d s o

Versorgungsspannung ausschalten! removing the EEprom! c n e

. s h

l l

i a

. t r

u e

t p

A a u

e s

a - t

s d d

, ,

o p

n n s

s e

- o m

s a

c s

r A m

o o b

c r 2

t u i

s s

1 i

e . t a

- , t u

u o

a h s

g i e x

a y

s 7 a s

7 i s

d H

N T r

s t

h n o

s u 2

4 n r

. e s

n h

s b in18

O o r T

h t

r e O e

I d

t v

y b

R n

S s .

(

s ,

o T . p

e t

T b u

t i a

o s

P n

i . n

s c

m s s

s e

P t h n

k s m e i

I o

E u a

e n

h i c

a c

Typ Type Spannung Powersupply Geräte-Nr. Device-no.

t Version

s e e

t e t h

h o

R n l r

h a m

e e n i

n t i h

l f u

T r

S t

o b c l

C h b o

i a t i

p o

w . e

i t a

r a o

c t

a h h

S t

t s e

t c t s

s d r

m n i

t R

y n n i

E i w e

s r e

s e e

e w o

C c a n

r l

t w

D i t i in1 in3 in5 in7 in9 in2 in11 in4 in13 in6 in15 in8 in17 in10 in12 in14 out in1 16 out2 out3 out4 out5 out6 out7 out8

n d D a t i d

b v

c b

E c

n y

a e 5 n a t u e

l e

F l y i

a r r a

e t

l e t

c n

s r 1 d q i

t t

e r n

E - c

v n s

e e

a e u

I n

h o o

t l

e e

d 3 r e

t n n l b

n q

o v

s r

R i n

h h

n 0 f i y

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 o o o u

c e

n n i

B T ( a i i B 9 l T c c c o r d f s b A KOMPAKTEDA 47-devices assignmentof the inputs to the measuring points of DataDistributor AHD W(A) for arbitrarily programm

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 X1 X2 1 wire TypeVoltageDevice-no. AHD 903-15 24VDC System address

1 wire

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 28 29 30 31 32 33 32 31 30 29 28 33 32 31 30 29 28 15 16 17 18 19 15 16 17 18 19

33 35 37 39 34 36 38 40 max. 18 substations 18 max. ribbon ribbon cable PS 47-1-15 PS 47-1-15 1 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 11 12 13 14 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 11 12 13 14 DataStations AHD 903-15 = inputs 270 18 18 BinaryStations PS47-1-15 or Analog 1 1 3 5 7 9 1113 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 2931 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 1820 22 24 26 28 3032

9 DATA DISTRIBUTOR AHD W (Version B)

- microprocessor controlled device for arbitrarily programmable data distribution - minimized wiring enabled by decentralized system design - can set up as many as 48 groups out of 564 serially registered reports, programmable on 4 serial outputs - printer interface - mountable on rails TS32 or TS35 - GL certified

CONTENTS PAGE

1. Introduction 3 2. Design 3 3. Function 3

Dimensional drawing 5 Technical data 6 Terminal diagram 6

2 1. Introduction

AHD W (Version B) is a microprocessor controlled device for serial data collection and arbitrarily programmable distribution.

2. Design

The device consists of an electronic card that is installed in a housing for mounting on rails TS32 or TS35. All inputs and outputs are led to two pluggable terminal blocks. The user has no need of additional terminal blocks.

There is an Eprom 27C256 on the electronic card that contains a system program and free memory space for project-specific programming. It can be removed (power switched off) and programmed according to the programming table. We recommend our portable programming device S4.

3. Function

AHD W (B) has 19 power-controlled serial optocoupler inputs and 10 serial transistor outputs. Like Data Distributor Version A (catalogue Section 14) that can receive data serially from the substations and assign them to arbitrarily programmable targets on other devices, Data Distributor Version B also has a distributor-function.

The device can, e.g. log, print and group the data from 12 alarm systems KOMPAKT EDA 47 via 12 serial inputs. Furthermore, it logs control-bits for alarm acknowledgement and transmits them, e.g., to the bridge and the engine rooms or mess.

serial collection of data zwwb-e.mcd

Start bit 47 data bits serial collection of data (plus 3 control bits) (high) 50 to 250 bits (low)

Data rate is 1200 Baud.

zwwb-e.mcd serial data output

Start bit 47 data bits serial output (high) approx. 250 bits (low)

Data rate is 1200 Baud.

3 Data Distributor AHD W (Version B) also enables decentralized logging of data and can thus minimize wiring and related costs. The inputs have an arbitrarily programmable output. Possible destination systems are, e.g., the alarm and display system KOMPAKT EDA 47 (also as group panel), or the module AHD 412, that can be used for direct switching of magnetic valves.

Customers may request the programming table if it is not already included.

4 Dimensional drawing wb-e.mcd

13 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 1921 2325 27 29 31 33

pluggable terminal block 64 BÖNING Power AHD W 24VDC B ACHTUNG: Vor Entnahme des EEproms CAUTION: Switch off power supply before Versorgungsspannungausschalten! removing the EEprom! 195 in 18 Typ Type Spannung Voltage Geräte-Nr. Device-no. Version Model in 1in 3in 5in 7in 9 in 2 in 11 in 4 in 13 in 6 in 15 in 8 in 17 in 10 in 12 in 14 inout 16 1 out2 out3 out4 out5 out6 out7 out8

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33

X1 X2 122

5 wba-e.mcd TECHNICAL DATA Power supply : 24 VDC +/- 25 % Power consumpt. of the electronics : app. 0.2 A Degree of protection : IP 00 Weight : 0.7kg Inputs/Outputs : 19 x serial input 10 x serial output Baudrate : 1200 Baud (or upon request)

Terminal Diagram

AHD W (B)

8 serial 0.63Amtr outputs 18 serial inputs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

+ -

free serial inputs serial1 input serial2 input serial3 input serial4 input serial5 input serial6 input serial7 input serial8 input serial9 input serial10 input serial11 input serial12 input 1 serial output 2 serial output 3 serial output 4 serial output Printer control panel Addr. of alarm 524 in AHD monitor free serial outputs serial free Supply 24VDC Supply24VDC +/-25%

6 AMPLIFIER FOR THERMOCOUPLERS NICRNI AHD 903 V

- 14 precision amplifiers for thermocouplers NiCrNi, (or fewer on request) with amplification factor 101 - can be connected to Analogue Data Station AHD 903 -15 for exhaust gas average value monitoring of diesel engines - modular design; all components have plug-in connections and can be mounted on rails - GL certified

Development, manufacturing, service for shipping and industry Böning Automationstechnologie GmbH & Co. KG • Am Steenöver 4 • D-27777 Ganderkesee Phone: +49(0)4221 9475-0 • Fax: +49(0)4221 9475-22 • Internet: www.boening.com • E-Mail: [email protected] Input 80 60 DIMENSIONAL DRAWING Terminal diagramTerminal + - 1 32 4 765 98 10 131211 1 14 Power supply : 24 VDC +/- 25 % +/- % 25 VDC 24 : humidity air relative Max. temperature ambient Perm. class Protection Weight Amplification A 0.2 app. : Outputs Inputs electronics the of cons. Power supply Power TECHNICAL DATA 1 2 4 612 2 814 10 16 22 18 24 3020 26 32 28 1 3 1 7 3915 115 17 13 19 25 21 2723 29 31

2 2 1 4 4 3 6

3 5 8 8 10 7 9 12

4 11 14 13 13 16 16 115 15 15 5 18 20 22 24 26 17 17 34-pole ribbon cable ribbon 34-pole 19 21 23 25 27

6 Thermocouple V AHD Amplifier903 28 28

7 30 32 34 29 5 165 1718 2019 232221 262524 31 33 34

8 33 Mountable on rails TS 32 and TS 35 and TS 32 TS rails on Mountable

9 cable ribbon 16-pole cable ribbon 34-pole

: 99% 99% : 70°C 0 to : 00 IP : kg 0.5 : 101 : 600°C, 0to app. to equivalent 02.52V to x 14 : no NiCrNi thermocoupler x 14 : 10 11 115

12 41651 DIN acc. relief strain eq are cables the ribbon of connections plug-in All 13 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 14

Typ AHD 903V 14 THERMOCOUPLES 14 Type AMPLIFYING FACTOR : 100 : FACTOR AMPLIFYING Spannung AMPLIFIER FOR AMPLIFIER 24VDC 110 Power supply AHD 903AHD V + - + Geräte-Nr. 24VDC±25% NiCrNi Device-no. Output corresp. to

terminal no. 21 3 54 76 98 10 1211 1 1413 16-pole ribbon cable ribbon 16-pole tcompensated 1 1 3 1 7 3915 115 13 2 2 4 612 2 814 10 16 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 60 uipped with uipped 9 10 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 903v-1-e.mcd 15 16 16 5 16 5 ground (-)

60 50

Relay Station with 15 Relays and Serial Control Type AHD R101

- Minimization of wiring for spatially separated systems - Parallel output of status reports that are available in serial format - Can be used as measuring transducer with Data Station AHD 903-15

Date: 04.03.2009

CONTENTS

Page

1 Introduction 3 2 Design 3 3 Function 3 4 Application-related specification for AHD-R101 4 5 Installation 5 5.1 Mounting 5 5.2 Wiring of the devices 5 6 Dimensional drawing with terminal diagram and technical data 6

Examples of application: Parallel-serial conversion of binary units with parallel output 7 Parallel-serial conversion of analogue limit values with parallel output 8 Serial transmission of status reports from the Diesel-Start-Stop-Automatic 9 AHD 414 with parallel output Serial transmission of status reports from the Alarm and Safety System 10 AHD 414A with parallel output

1 Introduction The AHD-R101 Module is a microprocessor controlled device with 2 serial inputs and 15 relay outputs. It can be used for the following tasks:

- Reduction of wiring for spatially separated systems - Parallel output of status reports that are available in serial format - Can be used as measuring transducer with Data Station AHD 903-15

The following can be used as transmitting devices:

- Binary Data Station PS 47-1-15 - Analogue Data Station AHD 903-15 - Diesel-Start-Stop-Automatic AHD 414 - Alarm and Safety System AHD 414A

2 Design AHD R101 comprises one electronic card containing the relays, which is installed in a plastic housing. All connections are established via 3 pluggable terminal blocks with a total of 51 terminals. The device is designed for mounting on rails TS 32 and TS35. The floating change-over contacts of each relay are led to the above mentioned terminal blocks.

3 Function The Relay Station AHD R101 is available with various software versions. Some application examples are given at the end of this documentation. The form attached under 4, „Application-Related Specification for AHD R101“ serves as template. It is filled in by the customer and provides the basis for software programming. Different functions are available on request.

The relay station can receive serial information (15 data bits per device) from up to 2 transmitters (e.g. the devices mentioned in section 1). The user can choose arbitrarily which information (data bit) shall be assigned to which relay. Furthermore, the user can determine individually for each relay, if its normal status shall be normally closed or open. If a relay is normally closed, it opens when at least one of the assigned data bits is activated.

In case a relay has not been assigned to any bit, and if it is normally closed, it is automatically assigned the function System Failure/Power Failure, which is important for many applications.

Several data bits can be assigned to the same relay. In this case, the input information will be OR-linked. The user can choose by configuration, if a relay shall function as first value indicator or new value indicator.

- In case of first value indication the relay switches, as soon as one of its assigned bits is activated. In case another bit is activated, this has no effect on the relay.

- In case of new value indication the relay switches to its normal status for approx. 3 seconds, starting at the second bit, before it switches to active status again. Thus, group or collective reports to, e.g., a superordinate alarm system are possible.

4 Application-Related Specification for AHD-R101

r101tab.mcd APPLICATION RELATED SPECIFICATIONS FOR AHD R101

Order No.: ......

Device No.: ......

serial input 1 input serial 2 input serial normally normallyFirst value New value Bit No.Relay Bit No. Relay Relay closed openindicator indicator 1 1 1

2 2 2

3 3 3

4 4 4

5 5 5

6 6 6

7 7 7

8 8 8

9 9 9

10 10 10

11 11 11

12 12 12

13 13 13

14 14 14

15 15 15

(16) (16)

101zw.doc Bit no. 16 is not received serially, but added internally with the program, if no data are received at the relevant input. Thus, it is possible to control a supervision of the transmitters, incl. their wiring to the relay station.

4 5 Installation

5.1 Mounting The device is installed in a terminal box, switch panel or any other housing, by mounting it on pre-installed rail TS32 or TS35. In order to avoid movement, e.g. caused by vibrations, standard stoppers can be used.

5.2 Wiring of the devices The serial inputs are separated from each other by optocouplers and galvanically from the power supply. The permitted total impedance of the serial wires is 80 Ohm. This corresponds to a cable diameter (Cu) 0.5 mm² and a cable length of more than 1,000 m. Normally, there are no particular requirements for the cable. Only in case of high EMC stress must a screened cable be used and the screening must be earthed at both ends.

N.B.: In case there are vacant wires within the cable that contains the serial wires, these must be earthed at one end, regardless of EMC stress. Otherwise, they could work as antennas and could overcouple (inductively or capacitively) to the serial wires and thus cause failures.

5 6. Dimensional Drawing with Terminal Diagram and technical Data

AHDR101e.mcd

IP 00 1 kg 250VDC/AC, 3A 24VDC +/- 25% 0.4A

Relay Station AHD R101

05/13/01 Technical Data: Degree of protection: Weight: Perm. load of relay contacts: Power supply of the electronics: Power consumption of the electronics: AHDR101e 130

pluggable terminal block

2 8

9 8 k7

3 0

3 1

9 k6

4 21

k 3

0 20 27 k5 3

6 19 26

7 18 25

8 1 17 24

1 k4

9 16 23

4 0

2 k3

2 147

4 3

4 k2

4 k1

mountable on rail TS 32 and TS 35

0 1 5 2 in serial

1 1 in serial

AHD R101 AHD

24VDC 23456 789101112131415 22 +

6 oo. dd3.doc al. r101f-e.mcd tht parallel outputtht parallel In this example, the inputs are transformed into transformed are inputs the example, this In and station data binary the by signal serial a k1 relays Here, station. relay the by received means This 15. to 1 inputs to assigned are k5 to t switches, k7 relay closes, 7 input e.g., if, that signals which shown are possibilities Below, can They station. data the by registered be can possible it is Thus, 1000m. to up transmitted be wires. 2 to 30 from wiring required the reduce to contact transfer floating a side, receiver the On is 3A and 250VAC/DC of load permitted a with available. microproces- a contains station relay the Since be can connections any almost sor-system, offer to ready we are request, On here. realized adaptions. software suitable Example4 Registration contacts2 of with2-pole connection. Example5 Registration contacts3 of thatswitch plus-potenti Here, theinputsare shortened in order to cause a potential inalternation the binarydata station at switchingcontacts.of the 31 28 32 29 33 30 34 21 27 s 35 20 26 36 19 25 37 18 24 38 17 23 39 16 22 40 15 41 14 42 13 parallel-serial transformationparallel-serial binary signals wiof 43 12 44 11 45 10 9 46 8 47 k1 k2 k3 k4 k5 k6 k7 Relay Station AHD R101 7 48

49 serial in 2 in serial 6 50 k15 k14 k13 k12 k11 k10 k9 k8

5 51 serial in 1 in serial 4

AHD R101 AHD 24VDC 2

Example1 Registration of binary3 with contacts mutual feedback. Example2 Registration of binary3 with contacts mutual minus-connection. Every second terminalof oneinput remainsunused. Example3 Registration of transistors2 mutualwith minus- connection(such sensors areconnected like contacts). Every second ofterminalone input remainsunused. + 1 NC/NO 14 15 13 282930 31 32 33 28 29 3031 3233 PS 47-1-15 PS 2 wires, up to 1000m transmission length transmission 1000m to up wires, 2 Connection possibilities for input of binary signal binary of input for possibilities Connection 2021 22 2324 2526 27

202122 232425 2627

24VDC±25% + - 24VDC±25% serial transmission serial + - 15 16 17 18 19 151617 1819 (-) BinaryData Station PS 47-1-15 (-) (+) 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213 14

Input no.: Input Input no.: Input

7 . re). r, - re ni- eed cti- red a h signed l not l the r101g-e.mcd 31 28 32 29 dd1.doc 33 30 34 21 27 35 20 26 36 19 25 37 18 24 38 17 23 39 16 22 40 15 alues withparallel output 41 14 42 13 43 12 44 11 Solution: con- are 2 and 1 inputs input-menu, suitable a With as is value min.-limiting A display. the by figured is that value, max.-limiting A (1,5bar). 1 input to 2. input to assigned is speed, run idle the as same sp the as long as So 2. input by blocked is 1 Input wil pressure oil the reached, not is value limiting 8s Only dropped. remains k1 Relay monitored. be a is k2 relay speed, run idle the of reaching after ba 1.5 to down goes pressure oil the case In vated. configu the of elapsing after activated is k1 relay time. delay the application, mentioned above the for Especially mo be can pressure oil the which with software a is enqui (please speed rotation the on depending tored 1000m is devices the between distance permitted The reduced is wiring placing, decentralized of case In wit contact transfer floating A wires. 2 to 30 from on available is 3A and 250VAC/DC of load permitted receiver. the of side the microprocessor the contains station relay the Since realized. be can connection any almost system, software suitable offer to ready are we request, On adaptions. After configuration of the datadisplay station, can the be LCD- removed. Thisfunction will not ofinfluence the devices. the 45 10 9 46 8 47 r er k1 k2 k3 k4 k5 k6 k7 e RelayStation AHD R101 7 , om 48 gine a or- ays uts 49

e of a of e ng ng serial in 2 in serial 6 50 k15 k14 k13 k12 k11 k10 k9 k8

5 51 serial in 1 in serial 4

AHD R101 AHD 24VDC 2 + 1 33 3435 3637 3839 40 can be realized. Switch-on and switch-off delays fr delays switch-off and Switch-on realized. be can mation, if and which inputs reached limiting values limiting reached inputs which and if mation, inp the Here, station. relay the to transmitted are rel the to assigned are station data the of 15 to 1 reaches 12 input e.g., if, that means This 15. to 1 measu- 15 Thus, switches. k12 relay value, limiting eachothe of independendt are that transformers ring b can input each Also, configured. be can 999s to 1 input. another by blocked Example: pressur oil lub. the of registration for is 1 Input to correspond current input 4-20mA Diesel-engine. be shall alarm an pressure, bar 1.5 At bar. 10 to 0 en 2, the input Over station. relay the by released cor- (4-20mA 4-20mA-signal a over entered is speed monitoring pressure Oil 1/min). 0-3000 to respond high 8s is speed engine the once done be only shall speed. run idle as same the or The analog data station has 15 inputs and can and inputs 15 has station data analog The and/or sensors following the evaluate and register signals: signals binary 0(2)-10V, 0(4)-20mA, Pt1000, Pt100, request). upon ones (customer-specific LCD-dis- the station, data the of configuration For There used. is keyboard external with 524 AHD play limiti two to up assign e.g. to possibility, the is inf the output, serial a Over input. each to values 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 parallel-serial transformationof analog limiting v 2 wires, toup 1000m transmission length Data 903-15AHDStation

ribboncable ' > # ? ß N U G ESC PAUSE DRUCK Analog . / \ : * - < + _ ÖÜ F6 Pt100, Pt1000, 0(4)-20mA, 0(2)-10V, binary signals (customer-specific ones upon request) T F F12 M $ Ä F5 6 3 L 9 S E Z F11 Bi ld Bild NUM ALT Enter 5 1617 18 19 2021 22 23 2425 2627 28 29 30 31 32 ' § % 8 5 2 F4 K F10 R Y D Entf. = ! 1 7 4 0 J F3 X E inf. C Po s 1 Ende ; , ) " serial transmission I P B Strg Funct ` ( F1 F2 F7 F8 F9 VW A H OQ SPACE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Input no.: Input

5-pole DIN plug-in connection - 24VDC±25% + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 1

AHD 524 AHD 24VDC±25% + - CONTRAST 2050

450 450 2050

450 82 82

DIM IS MAX ribboncable 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 5 8 similar inputs - + INFO 8 similar inputs ME Pt. Oil pressure bar 1.5 4.39 ME Pt. Rotation speed 1/min 580 1962 ME Pt. Cool. water temp. 81.1 °C ME Pt. Cool. water press. bar 1.8 3.03 ME Pt. Engine speed 1/m 1561 ME Pt. Gear oil pressure bar 8.8 10.3 ME Pt. Row A exh.gas tp. 397 °C ME Pt. Row B exh.gas tp. 392 °C MT Stb. Oil pressure bar 1.5 4.39 ME Stb. Rotation speed 1/min 580 1962 ME Stb. Cool. wat. temp. 80.4 °C ME Stb. Cool. wat. press. bar 1.8 3.03 ME Stb. Engine speed 1/m 1568 ME Stb. Gear oil press. bar 8.8 10.3 ME Stb. Row A exh.g. tp. 376 °C PANEL 1 : U MIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON BÖNING

8 r101h-e.mcd

el-start-

dd4.doc

(MONITORING ON = meas. point 1) point meas. = ON (MONITORING Serial protocol from the diesel-start- the from protocol Serial stations. relay the to automatic break Wire 1. speed Firing 2. cancelled blocking Alarm 3. alarm Collective 4. stop Manual 5. start for ready Engine 6. stop Automatic 7. running is program Start 8. 9 point Measuring 9. 10. Measuring point 8 point Measuring 10. 7 point Measuring 11. 6 point Measuring 12. failure Start 13. sensor speed Failure 14. Overspeed 15. HD 414. It has a serial output serial a has It 414. HD to the relays 1 to 15. Therefore, 15. to 1 relays the to ffer suitable software adaptions. software suitable ffer ystem, almost any connections any almost ystem, 31 28 below in intervals of less than 0.5s. than less of intervals in below k8 switches, and so on. so and switches, k8 32 29 33 30 34 21 27 35 20 26 36 19 25 37 18 24 stop-automatic AHD 414 with parallel output parallel with 414 AHD stop-automatic 38 17 23 39 16 22 40 15 41 14 42 13 serial transmission of status reports from the dies the from reports status of transmission serial 43 12 44 11 45 10 9 46 8 47 k1 k2 k3 k4 k5 k6 k7 Relay Station AHD R101 7 48

49 serial in 2 in serial 6 50 k15 k14 k13 k12 k11 k10 k9 k8

5 51 serial in 1 in serial 4

The example shows the Diesel-Start-Stop-Automatic A Diesel-Start-Stop-Automatic the shows example The to o ready are we request, On here. realized be can that cyclically emits the 15 status signals listed listed signals status 15 the emits cyclically that assigned be can they station, relay of the means By microprocessor-s a contains station relay the Since if, e.g., the engine is ready for operation, relay relay operation, for ready is engine the e.g., if,

AHD R101 AHD 24VDC 2 + 1 (-)

2 wires, up to 1000m transmission length transmission 1000m to up wires, 2

+24V

Remote stop Remote

Remote start Remote 4-40V or 4-40V

T S T A R T S O P TEST sensor Speed RESET 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 22 1920 18 16517

6 7 8 9 9 10 8 7 6

serial transmission serial Meas. point no.

Collective report Collective K7

ENGINE ENGINE IS STARTING ENGINE ENGINE IS PREGLOWING

K6 Alarm system on alert on system Alarm

ific

a Horn

mer-spe

Firing speed Firing

Solenoid/operat. magnet Solenoid/operat. cu K3

Starter - SENSOR CIRCUIT - SENSOR K2

SUPERVISION ON WIRE-BREAKSTOP CIRCUIT START FAILURE FAILURESPEED SENSOR OVERSPEED STOP STARTBLOCKIERUNG K1 BÖNING Preglowing

AHD414 Supply 24VDC 24VDC Supply 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 13 14 12 11 10 9 7 8 5 6 4 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meas. point no.

9 r101m-e.mcd dd5.doc 1 to 12 corr. to meas. point 1 to to 12 1 point meas. to corr. 12 to 1 k1 relay group 13. k2 relay group 14. k3 relay group 15. Serial protocol from alarm and alarm from protocol Serial 414A AHD system safety Bit-no. 14A. It has a serial output serial a has It 14A. to the relays 1 to 15. to 1 relays the to r suitable software adaptions. software suitable r ystem, almost any connection any almost ystem, gnals in intervals of less than 0.5s. than less of intervals in gnals 31 28 32 29 33 30 34 21 27 35 20 26 36 19 25 37 18 24 38 17 23 39 16 22 alarm and system AHD 414A with parallel output parallel with 414A AHD system and alarm serial transmission of status reports from the from reports status of transmission serial 40 15 41 14 42 13 43 12 44 11 45 10 9 46 8 47 k1 k2 k3 k4 k5 k6 k7 RelayStation AHD R101 7 48

49 serial in 2 in serial 6 50 k15 k14 k13 k12 k11 k10 k9 k8

5 51 serial in 1 in serial 4

The example shows the alarm and safety system AHD 4 AHD system safety and alarm the shows example The si status 15 listed below the emits cyclically that microprocessor-s a contains station relay the Since offe to ready are we request, Upon realized. be can By means of the relay station, they can be assigned be can they station, relay of the means By

AHD R101 AHD 24VDC 2 + 1

2 wires, up to 1000m transmission length transmission 1000m to up wires, 2

serial input serial

24V

Acknowl. optics Acknowl.

Acknowl. horn Acknowl. Eng. in operation in Eng. R E S E T TEST 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 5 NC/NO ENGINE STOP ENGINE

serielle Übertragung serielle ic

meas. point no.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111

Horn K4

marking K3

customer-s ) - (

Engine stop Engine K1 ENGINE IN OPERATION IN ENGINE 25% ± 24VDC, WIRE BREAK STOP CIRCUIT/ STOP BREAK WIRE CIRCUIT SENSOR BÖNING + - AHD414A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 34 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Meas. point Meas. no.

10 Pulse length dimmer AHD 601 for DC current applications

- 240W (10A at 24V, 20A at 12V) - 8 to 35VDC power supply - short-circuit proof - 3 adjustable modes of operation possible - pushbutton operation - photo-resistor operation for automatic, ambient brightness adjustment - potentiometer operation

- mountable on rail TS 32 or 35 - plug-in terminal block

Mode of operation Introduction The dimmer has the following three modes of The pulse length dimmer AHD 601 is used for operation which can be selected with a DIP switch: dimming of lamps and LEDs that are operated with a DC current of 8 to 35V with 240W. The Pushbutton operation: permissible permanent current at 24V power supply is therefore 10A. A load of 18A is permissible for a Pressing on this key alternates between the status short time. The device is also appropriate for interior on (100%) and off (0%). Permanent pushing of the lights, e.g. on yachts. key causes a ramp-shaped dimming process (0- 100%). The dimmer is continuously activated until Design/Function maximal brightness is reached and then shuts down again in a reverse course. If the lamp (or any other AHD 601 consists of an electronic unit with a consumer) is already dimmed, the dimmer switches processor system in a housing for rail mounting (TS off every time it is briefly activated. 32 or TS 35). A 12-pole plug-in terminal block is provided for the external electrical connections. Operation with a photo resistor: Dimming is carried out by emitting pulse lengths that In this operating mode, dimming is carried out depend on the adjustment, or on the ambient automatically, in dependence on ambient brightness when photo resistor operation is brightness. If the photo resistor is activated selected. The frequency, which is independent of sufficiently by the ambient light, the dimmer the relevant dimming, is approximately 85Hz. This is responses with maximum brightness. At dusk, it will invisible to the human eye and therefore flicker-free. reduce its brightness. In complete darkness, it is dimmed to the maximum. The device is protected against overheating, as well as against short-circuiting. In both cases, the Operation with a potentiometer: integrated power switch shuts off electronically. A 10kOhm potentiometer is connected at terminals After the short or the overtemperature has been 10 and 11. The brightness of the dimmed remedied, the device becomes operational again consumers depends on its adjustment. and automatically restarts. AHD 601 has an integrated protection against incorrect polarity. The devices are delivered preset on potentiometer operation. A trimming potentiometer is provided on the printed circuit board for limitation of dimming.

Without this limitation, the pulse-length pause ratio in darkness is approximately 1:200, i.e. the dimmer is only turned on for about 0.5% of the whole time (max. dimming).

pluggable terminal block

TYPE AHD 601 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1112 8 9 6 7 4 5 2 3 1 Speisung 8 - 35VDC - + Power supply 8 - 35VDC Schaltereinstellung zur Betriebsartwahl Switch setting for choice of kind of operation

Last/ Load, max 240W Tasterbetrieb ON + 8 - 35VDC Keyboard operation 1 2 3

dep. on kind of operation of kind on dep. Betriebsart nach je Fotozellenbetrieb ON Taster Photo resistor operation 1 2 3 Key 1 2 3 77 Potentiometerbetrieb ON Potentiometer operation Fotozelle 1 2 3 Photo resistor

10 Trimmpoti zur Einstellung der Dimmung bei Dunkelheit Potentiometer Trimmer potentiometer for adjustment of dimming at darkness 10k

BÖNING GMBH AUTOMATIONSTECHNIK

158 56

mountable on rail TS 32 and TS 35 TERMINAL DIAGRAM

AHD 601

Switch positions for choice of kind of operation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ON Key operation + - 1 2 3

ON Photo resistor operation 1 2 3 Load, max. 240W max. Load, ON Potentiometer operation 1 2 3 Key operation Key with Operation 1 LDR res. photo with Operation potentiometer Voltage 8 to 35VDC to 8 Voltage + 8 to to 35VDC 8 +

Connection depending on kind of operation

TECHNICAL DATA

Power supply : 8 to 35VDC Perm. load : 240W (10A at 24V, 20A at 12V) Weight : 0.3 kg Potentiometer : 10k (larger or same as 0.2W) Perm. ambient temperature : 0 to 70°C

Attention: If device and load are powered by different sources, both sources must be connected minus-sided with each other.

PHOTO RESISTOR FOR DESK INSTALLATION TYPE LDR 1

M 8 x 0.75

Plug-in contacts SW 10 2.8 x 0,8 13

3 7 10

14 15 9 INSULATION MONITORING DEVICE AHD 519

519-kate.mcd

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AHD 519 is an electronic device for the continuous monitoring of electrical insulation resistances and is mainly used Chart 1 (stop-alarm) for electric engines. Measurement is done at resting engine. The device is mounted in a case for rail mounting (TS32/TS35). All connections are done over a 12-pole terminal block. Limit. value Switch on (Ohm) 1 2 3 1.16M - - - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1.0M x - - 0.92M - x - On the circuit, there are 3 DIP-switches which enable setting of 1 out of 7 reference resistance values according to chart 1. 0.89M - - x - If the insulation resistance falls below the preset value, a relay switches that can be used either for alarming or to block 0.75M x x switching on of the consumer. 0.74M x - x 0.70M - x x 0.52M x x x In case the insulation resistance drops to about 20% over the preset value, this will cause a pre-alarm. This pre- The first alarm levels are aproximately 0.3MOhm alarm is transmitted to the terminal block via an optocoupler. It is normally closed and is blocked in the event of over the Stop alarm level. an alarm. In the event of a power failure, the optocoupler will also be blocked.

Dropping of the insulation resistance is usually a slow process and measuring and alarming time are not critical. 2 4 6 8 10 12 In order to avoid false alarms, the electronics operates with a time delay that depends on how far and how fast the value falls below the pre-set insulation resistance. It can take up to a couple of minutes.

Pre- and main-alarm will be indicated additionally on the circuit board by a yellow and a red LED. 1 3 5 7 9 11 62

for mounting on TS32/35

DIP-switch for setting the limiting values

1 2 3 off Transformer on (short circuit safe) Alarm Stop-Alarm 63.704

47Ohm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 90 pre-alarm

main alarm Attention: The optocoupler is switched through as usual (no pre-alarm, which means L1L2 L3 the route from terminal 9 to 10 only has a low ohm resistance. In the event of a pre-alarm, it becomes a high ohm resistance. The voltage direction is from 230V, 48-62Hz term. 9 to 8. If an external device, e.g. SPS is connected wrongly, the voltage will flow over the protection diode, which means the route from term. 8 to 9 can always pass through, independent of the status of the optocoupler. Isolation max. resistance =50mA I TECHNICAL FEATURES M - + Umax. =30VDC Power supply : 220V, 48 - 62Hz, +- 25% Power consumption : 0.04A aprox. Perm. load of relay contacts : 250 VAC/5A or 50 VDC/2A Perm. load at optocoup. output: 30 VDC Degree of protection : IP 00 Weight : 0.2 kg aprox. Permissible amb. temperature : 0 - 65 °C

MODULAR NAVIGATION LIGHTS CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM DPS 01

- System consists of: - base module AHD 901 G - 1 - 4 substations AHD 910 A (8 - 32 light circuits) - one or more control and display units AHD 406-2D (individual design according to instructions) - parallel display(s), if necessary

- suitable for all common light voltages (24 V DC/AC to 250 VAC) - lights are connected directly with the substations (no further terminal block required) - light circuits are protected from two sides - connection of parallel displays possible - even in case of electronic fault, operation of the lights is still possible. - LEDs in the display unit can be freely assigned to the navigation lights - modules control each other - dimming of display elements with photo resistor - display and operating panel AHD 406-2D can be delivered with front-cap (protection IP 54) - GL certified

The unit consists of :

- 1 base module AHD 901 G - 1 to 4 substation modules AHD 910 A with 8 light circuits each - 1 display and control unit AHD 406-2D - 1 selector switch - parallel displays AHD 406-2D and/or further switches, if necessary

The devices are connected with each other by ribbon cables.

2. Function

Main and emergency power supply, as well as the selector switch, are connected to the base module AHD 901 G. The base module monitors the main and emergency supply and communicates via serial bus with the substation modules and the control unit.

The navigation lights are controlled by switches in the control unit and auxiliary relays on the substations. Up to 8 lights can be connected to each of the four possible substation modules AHD 901 A. Thus, 32 light circuits can be controlled and monitored by a single system. There is bipolar protection of the light circuits. The fuses are located directly behind the relays that belong to the light circuit. Safety fuses are used for 230V lights, and automatically resetting semiconductor fuses for 24V lights. The principle design of the system enables installation of several control units with displays, as may be required.

Basic module AHD 901G, 24VDC

Submodule AHD 910A, 24VDC The electronics distinguish between the following conditions:

- light is switched off - light is switched on and illuminated - light is switched on and not illuminated (alarm, if main switch is not in OFF position)

This information is processed in the base module AHD 901 G and transmitted via serial bus to the display and control unit AHD 406 2D. The condition of the lights is displayed here as follows:

- light is switched off: ‘Display-LED off’ - light is switched on and illuminated: ‘Display-LED on’ - light is switched on, but not illuminated, and main switch is not in OFF position: ‘Display-LED flashing’

A buzzer is installed in the display and control unit. It is activated at every alarm and that can be acknowledged by means of the designated push button on the front panel. The flashing LEDs that indicate the faulty state of the navigation lights can not be deactivated, as otherwise there might be confusion between them and the switched-on and illuminated lights. These LEDs are automatically dimmed by a photo cell.

The display and control unit AHD 406-2D is designed according to the customer’s instructions and adapted to respective requirements. The standard front dimensions are 144mm X 144mm or 192mm X 144mm. The aluminum front panel is standard black with white print.

EVEN IN THE EVENT OF BREAKDOWN OF THE ELECTRONICS, THE LIGHTS CAN STILL BE CONTROLLED.

3. Commissioning a) Set selector switch to ‘Main Supply’. b) Switch the lights on separately checking whether the correct lights are on. c) Switch on all lanterns in sequence, break the relevant circuit to check if the alarm is triggered. Check signal horn reset together with light test. d) Set selector switch to position ‘O’ and switch on one of the navigation lights. The light does not glow and no alarm should be activated. e) Set selector switch to position ‘Emergency Supply’ and switch on one of the navigation lights. The lantern must glow. f) Alternately switch off main and emergency supply. In both cases, the alarm ‘Main/Emergency Supply’ must then be activated. Example for front panel:

2099-1e.MCD BÖNING AHD 406-2D

D Masthead I M Mains - 0 - Emergency

Bb. Stb. NUC Signal green

Signal white

Stern NUC Signal white

FAILURE MAINS-/EMERGENCY SUPPLY

SYSTEM FAILURE TEST

Individual lights are operated by means of an illuminated push button that can be red, yellow or green.

Double lights are controlled by means of a toggle switch with a neutral position. Below the toggle switch there is a red, yellow or green LED. Marking of lanterns with indication of color.

406d2e.mcd

Customer :

Order-no. : Voltage :

Submodule 1 Submodule 2 1) 1) No. Marking of lamps Color No. Marking of lamps Color 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8

Submodule 3 Submodule 4 1) 1) No. Marking of lamps Color No. Marking of lamps Color 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8

1) red, yellow or green Frontlayout for operating units with front dimensions of 144mm x 144mm

406d2e.MCD

BÖNING AHD 406-2D

D I M Mains - 0 - Emergency

FAILURE MAINS-/EMERGENCY SUPPLY

SYSTEM FAILURE TEST

Please enter your draft with arrangements of lanterns.

In case only individual lanterns are used, this symbol is inapplicable Mains - 0 - Reserve Frontlayout for operating units with front dimensions of 192mm x 144mm

406d2.MCD I D M TEST AHD 406-2D FAILUREMAINS/ Mains - 0 - Emergency - 0 - Mains SYSTEM FAILURE BÖNING EMERGENCY SUPPLY

Please enter your draft with arrangements of lanterns.

In case only individual lanterns are used, this symbol is inapplicable Mains - 0 - Emergency 78 73 str-2-e.MCD 144 53

BÖNING AHD 406-2D

Top D I M Mains - 0 - Reserve

Signal lanterns 2. Top Signal lanterns Pt. can be hoisted

Bb. Stb. red red Panel cut-out: 138 mm x 138 mm white red 144 8-pole pluggable 8-pole block terminal Heck Power cons. of the electronics app. 0.25A red white (1 x AHD 901G, 2 x AHD 910A, 1 x 406-2D)

Horn relay (NO) Schlepp (buzzer is installed in the 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 1 5 6 7 8 device) FAILURE MAINS-/EMERGENCY SUPPLY

SYSTEM FAILURE TEST

Front panel design and amount of 20-pole ribbon cable switches is subject to agreement. Mains supply Mains Off supply Emergency

0 1 2 SELECTOR SWITCH SELECTOR Klöckner Moeller Klöckner 3-8212 TO Type 10-pole ribbon cable ribbon 10-pole 10-pole ribbon cable ribbon 10-pole Stern, ResStern, Main Stern, Stb, Res Stb, Main Stb, Res Pt, Main Pt., Drive failure (below) red Drive failure white Drive failure top) (on red Drive failure Res. Top Top Res. Top Signal white (hoistable) white (hoistable) Signal below) from (hoistable, red Signal top) from (hoistable, red Signal Tow Tow Top 2nd 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2 6 5 7 1 supply Emergency 24VDC±25% 3 supply Mains 24VDC±25% 3 2 1 14-pole ribbon cable 14-pole ribbon cable

- + - +

20 19 18 1716 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 19 18 1716 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 1918 17161514 1312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

BASE MODULE AHD 901G BB A A - microprocessor controlled - supervision of supply voltages - control of submodules - mountable on TS 32 or TS 35 k7 k6 k5 k4 k3 k2 k7 k6 k5 k4 k3 k2 - Dimensions: 185mm l. x 125mm w. x 60mm d. Relay k1 Relay Relais k8 Relais k1 Relais Relay k8 Relay

Fuses block at overvoltage or short and 2 Fuses block at overvoltage or short and 1 become conductive again after the source become conductive again after the source of the failure is removed. of the failure is removed.

SUBMODULE AHD 910A

- for addressing of 8 monitored lamps - mountable on TS 32 or TS 35 Function of the position lanterns is guaranteed even at failure of the electronic. - dimensions: 235mm long x 125mm wide x 45mm deep bugbw-e.mcd DECENTRALIZED BOW THRUSTER CONTROL 192

AHD 419

ready for Operating Unit AHD 419 overload on bridge and wing panels operation motortemp. load >145°C reduction motortemp. fan >155°C failure sensor system ammeter failure failure test oillevel programm mode d i 144 m

stop 4 wires incl. power supply

to next operating unit step 3 step 2 step 1 step 1 step 2 step 3

- optimized system for electronic control of bow thrusters driven by slip-ring rotor engines - small, powerful and robust devices - serial communication reduces required wiring to only 4 wires - analog entry of engine current and coiling temperature; therefore no additional signal processor required - current limiting values depend on the level and are programmable via the operating unit - status of all in- and outputs of the central unit are visualized by LEDs: clearly and directly at the terminal blocks. - integrated digital ammeter in the operating units - up to four operating units connectable - can be connected to voyage recorder with interface module AHD 425 - type-approved by: ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS

232

Interface 4 wires incl. power supply power incl. wires 4 Module AHD 425 55 (optional) pluggable terminal blocks 10 1 2 Power Failure BÖNING 3 4

mountable on rails TS 32 and TS 35 5

6 s.o. AHD 419 port 7

8 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 9

so AHD 419 bridge 11 12 13 14 s.o. AHD 419 stb. 425 AHD 24VDC supply Power Type 15 16 17 18 s.o. AHD 419 (add.) 19 20 21 22 s.o. AHD 418 Tx- 112 Tx+ electronics locking power- switch on serial input level 3 serial output supply 70% 85% Fan 100% Reserve Type AHD 418 AHD Type Turn. contactor Bb. Turn. contactor Stb. Interm. level 1 Interm. level 2 Interm. level 3 Interm. level 4 Interm. level 5 Interm. level 6 Voyage- Oil (NC)level alarm resetover- temp. (155°C) temp.(155°C) Recorder Engine overcurrent Engine current reg. Sensor failure Engine temp.> 145°C Engine temp.> 155°C Engine temp. Sensor failure

Central Unit AHD 418 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 at power element Böning GmbH - Automationstechnik Am Steenöver 4, D27777 Ganderkesee, Tel. (49) 04221-9475-0, Fax. -21 oder 22 Development, manufacturing,E-Mail [email protected] service for shipping and industry EntwicklungBöning - AutomationstechnologieFertigung - Service GmbH für Schifffahrt & Co. KG • Amund St Industrieeenöver 4 • D-27777 Ganderkesee Phone: +49(0)4221 9475-0 • Fax: +49(0)4221 9475-22 • Internet: www.boening.com • E-Mail: [email protected]

1 Contents Page

1.0 Introduction 3 1.1 Design and performance features 3 1.2 Description of functions 3

2.0 Central Unit AHD 418 4 2.1 Inputs 5 2.2 Outputs 6 2.3 DIP switch settings 6 2.4 Technical data 7 2.5 Relay life 8 2.5 AHD 418 Dimensions 9

3.0 Control Unit AHD 419 10 3.1 Master control console and the ON/OFF function 10 3.2 Alarms and indicators 10 3.3 Operating controls 12 3.4 Programming the current limit values 13 3.5 Dimensions and panel cut-out for AHD 419 14 3.6 Technical data 15

4.0 Connecting the bow thruster control to a data log 16 4.1 General 16 4.2 Design 17 4.3 Function 17 4.4 Installation 17 4.4.1 Fitting 17 4.4.2 Equipment wiring 17 4.4.3 DIP switch settings 18 4.5 Technical data 19 4.6 Dimensions 19 4.7 Serial output protocol 20

5.0 Connection diagram for installations with no data log 21 5.1 Connection diagram for installations with data log 22

2 1.0 Introduction

The following description refers to the electronic components of the bow thruster control. The drive unit consists of a 3-phase asynchronous motor (slip-ring rotor) and variable pitch propeller. The rotation speed, and thus motor power, is varied by switching resistances in and out of the rotor circuit. Changing the direction of rotation, and consequently the ship’s direction of movement (port/starboard), is achieved by switching over two of the phases.

1.1 Design and performance features

The bow thruster control consists of a central unit AHD 418, which is installed either next to the power unit or in the bow thruster control cabinet, and a number of control units AHD 419. In addition there is an optional interface module AHD 425 for connecting a data log. Up to 4 control units can be connected. Normally there will be one control unit on the bridge and one at each bridge wing control position.

The equipment is interconnected by means of a 4-core parallel bus cable, which also carries the power supply. Serial communication results in minimum wiring.

1.2 Description of functions

The system is connected up in accordance with the wiring diagrams at the end of this document. The system is set in operation by means of the ‘ON’ switch on the bridge console, and the power switch on the main switch panel. All the alarms are then simultaneously armed and the fan activated. Operational readiness is indicated by a green lamp.

On the AHD 419 control panel (see page 11) there are three step-buttons for port and starboard respectively, by means of which the bow thruster can be driven in the desired direction and at the desired power level. For example, if ‘Step 3, Port’ is selected when in the idle state, the relevant changeover contactor operates first, followed at programmable time intervals by the contactors for 70%, 85%, maximum of 6 intermediate steps, and finally the 100% step. Three switching sequences can be set. Other switching sequences, as well as the number of intermediate steps between 85% and 100%, are factory programmable.

During ramping-up, the actuated contactors are checked to confirm that they have actually switched over, each having a potential-free contact which is led back to the central unit for monitoring. If this confirmation is unsuccessful, the equipment automatically switches back one step, and the ‘Load Reduction’ and ‘System Failure’ alarms are activated. However, if the feedback from a contact yields a positive result even though the relevant contactor was not activated, the bow thruster stops, and the ‘System Failure’ alarm is activated.

The motor current is read by the central unit in analogue form via a 1000:1 current transformer, converted to serial format and then displayed on the control units as a 4-digit number. (The equipment can also be factory modified to use current transformers with other division ratios). At the same time the magnitude of the current is constantly being compared with the limit set for that particular step. If the current is exceeded, the ‘Overload’ and ‘Load Reduced’ alarms are triggered after 10 seconds (other intervals on request), and the system switches simultaneously to the next lower step. If the current measured at this step is still too high, the system switches back a further step within the same clock interval, repeating until it finally stops.

As well as the current, the temperature is also monitored. For this purpose the AHD 418 central unit has an input ‘Temp > 145°C’ which triggers an alarm. A further input ‘Temp > 155°C’ results in the bow thruster switching off. The temperatures are read in analogue form,

3 so there is no need for additional processing hardware. The sensors are assembled into the windings by the motor manufacturer and are PTC thermistors conforming to DIN 44081 – triplet sensors (others on request).

The AHD 418 is programmed in such a way that, following a 155°C alarm and subsequent shut down, it cannot simply be restarted after the system has cooled down. This alarm can only be cleared ‘in situ’. The AHD 418 has a further dedicated input ‘Reset overtemperature’ which in this instance must be activated first. It will therefore be necessary to enter the bow thruster area and investigate the cause of the problem. If this function is unwanted, the ‘Reset’ input must be bridged.

A dedicated input is available for connecting an engine-mounted oil level monitor. If the level falls below the minimum permissible, an alarm is flagged on the control panel. In addition, the module has an input for limiting the maximum power to 85%. If this is activated, the ‘Load Reduction’ indicators on the control units light up, but there is no sound warning. By means of this function, power supply overloads can be avoided if, e.g., not all the auxiliary generators are in operation.

2.0 Central Unit AHD 418

AHD 418 is a module intended for installation in a switch cabinet and is mounted on TS32 or TS35 bus rails. The central unit is a microcontroller-based electronic module with the following features:

• serial communication with up to four AHD 419 control units • direct access to the changeover, step, and intermediate contactors, including monitoring of their feedback signals • control of the three main steps (70%, 85%, 100%) and up to 6 intermediate steps • fan control and monitoring • monitoring of the motor current and winding temperatures • monitoring of the motor oil level • monitoring of the contactor actuating voltage (power switch) • controllable blocking of the 100% step • high capacity relays for contactor control; the use of auxiliary contactors is only necessary in exceptional cases • integrated LED status indicators for all inputs and outputs, as well as the most important alarms (over-current and over-temperature) in the AHD 418 control unit

4 2.1 Inputs

All the available inputs, together with their applicable parameters, are described below:

Input Sensor Delay Alarm/Display Response (Sec.) AHD 418 AHD 419 ------Motor temp. 145°C PTC-Thermistor 7 LED motortemp. Early warning Analogue I/P with sensor DIN44081– (red) >145°C failure monitoring Triplet sensor

Motor temp. 155°C PTC-Thermistor 7 LED motortemp. System shuts down. Analogue I/P with sensor DIN44081– (red) >155°C failure monitoring Triplet sensor

Current 0-1500mA AC Current txfmr 10 LED Overload Reduce by one step. Analogue I/P with sensor 1000:1 (250:1), (red) failure monitoring others on request

Reset overtemp alarm Contact 1 LED Stop - Cancel 155°C overtemp. alarm.

Step 3 blocking Contact 1 LED Load reduction Power limited to 85% max.

Oil level Contact 10 LED Alarm triggered.

11 x contactor acknow- Contact 0.7 LED System failure, Alarm triggered if acknowledge- ledgement: step conta- load reduction ment contact has not closed ctors 70%; 85%, Z1-Z6, within the delay time following 100%. changeover contactor actuation. contactors: pt; stbd 1 System failure Alarm triggered if acknowledge- (without further ment contact has closed message) without a contactor being actuated.

Fan contactor Contact 3 LED Fan failure Alarm triggered if acknowledge- acknowledgement ment contact has not closed within the delay time following contactor actuation.

Power switch Optocoupler 1 LED Power switch Alarm triggered if power switch (230V AC) failure fails.

Serial input Optocoupler 5 LED System failure. System shuts down if no data extin- Display shows can be received from AHD 418 guishes “E-SE”

N.B.:

The times given in the delay column refer to the internal status of the AHD 418 central unit. As a result of the serial communication, including data checking, a further 1 to 2 seconds, depending on the signal, can elapse before the result is displayed on the AHD 419 control panel.

The analogue motor temperature inputs have a hysteresis characteristic. The alarm ON resistance is approx. 3 kOhm, and the OFF resistance approx. 1.5 kOhm. A sensor error is generated if the resistance value is greater than approx. 25 kOhm.

During current measurement, a sensor error will be generated if any power step is activated and the current is at the same time less than 50 A. The time delay for a sensor error signal is the same as that of the corresponding alarm and is thus 7 or 10 seconds.

5 2.2 Outputs

All the available outputs, together with their applicable parameters, are described below:

Output Contact Display/Response

------

11 x step contactor Normally open : Status indication LED 70%; 85%, Z1-Z6, 100% 250VAC, 6 Amp. resistive load. With inductive loads the contact life is reduced dependent on power factor (see page 8 )

2 x changeover contactor: Normally open: Status indication LED port, starboard 250VAC, 16 Amp. resistive load. With inductive loads the contact life is reduced dependent on power factor (see page 8 )

Serial output linebreak Optocoupler LED extinguishes if line breaks. AHD 419 stops sending Data. This leads to the AHD 418 system shutting down.

2.3 DIP Switch Setting

The switching logic and switching times can be set by means of a 4-way DIP switch located beside the terminal strip (1) on the module. A further 2-way DIP switch situated beneath the cover enables the use of a different current transformer. Switch combinations not shown are reserved for internal use and may not be selected.

6 Factory settings are shown in bold print. a) 4-way DIP switch:

Switch Switching logic – Step sequence 1 2 WSch70% 85% Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 100% ------off offX - X X X X - - - X off onX X X X X X X X X X on offX X X X X - - - - X

Switch Switching times (sec.) 3 4 Step change Direction change Port Starboard ------off off 2 4 off on 3 5 on off 4 6 b) 2-way DIP switch:

Switch AC current transformer ratio 1 2 ------off off 1000 : 1 on off 250 : 1

2.4 Technical Data

Supply voltage: 24 VDC +/- 25% Current consumption: max. 0.3 Amp. Weight: 700g Inputs: 2 x analogue for temperature acquisition (PTC-DIN44081-triplet) 1 x analog for current acquisition 16 x optocouplers for control, alarms, acknowledgement and communication Optical indicators: 38 x LED for alarm or status indication Outputs: 11 x contact 250VAC/1500VA for step contactors and fan 2 x contact 250VAC/4000VA for changeover contactors, port and starboard 1 x optocoupler for communication

7 2.5 Relay Life

Relays are fitted on the AHD 418 printed circuit board for controlling external contactors. The contactors do not form part of the supplied equipment, but rather are specified and fitted by the main equipment manufacturer. The following diagrams will help with their design.

Contact life period for level-, fan- and reserve relays 418r1-e.mcd

Amount of switching procedures 107

106

105

104 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6

Breaking capacity ( kVA )

Contact life period for turning relays Amount of switching procedures 107

106

105

104 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0

Breaking capacity ( kVA )

Life period reduction factor Reduction at variable cos phi factor F 418r.doc 1.0 Parallel to the output terminals of the relays and 0.9 therefore also parallel to the external power contact- 0.8 ors, there are condensators and varistors. Both 0.7 Measures prolong the life span of the relays. The 0.6 diagrams are taken from the documentation from the 0.5 relay manufacturer and do not take this into account.

0.4

0.3 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 Power factor cos phi

8 2.6 AHD 418 Dimensions

41893A-e.MCD 112

Plug-in terminal blocks

112 Type AHD 418 AHD Type

73 94 14 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

electronics alarm

Supply

Oil level (NC) level Oil

step 3 step temp. (155°C) (155°C) temp.

Locking Reset over- Reset

input

Serial

sensor failure sensor

Motor current registr. current Motor

output

Motor over current current over Motor Serial

sensor failure sensor

Motor temp. Motor

45 on switch Motor temp.> 155°C temp.> Motor Power

46 Motor temp.> 145°C temp.> Motor 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 47

48 Turn contactor St.b contactor Turn

49 50 B.b contactor Turn 232 51

52 Fan 53

54 Reserve 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 55

56 100% 57

58 Intermediate step 6 step Intermediate 59

Mountable on rails TS 32 and TS 35 TS 32 and TS on rails Mountable 60 Intermediate step 5 step Intermediate 61

62 Intermediate step 4 step Intermediate 63

64 Intermediate step 3 step Intermediate 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 65

66 Intermediate step 2 step Intermediate 67

68 Intermediate step 1 step Intermediate 69

70 85% 71

72 70% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 3.0 Operator and display unit AHD 419

The AHD 419 operator and display units are usually fitted on the ship’s bridge or bridge wings. The low wiring cost also offers the possibility of mounting appropriate connector outlets, e.g. on deck, so that the bow thruster can be operated from there with a mobile unit, if required.

The front face of the equipment consists of a powder-coated, black aluminium plate, which is sealed on top by a membrane and on the underside with an O-ring against the console. These measures ensure that the front face meets protection class IP 67.

The input keys are illuminated and are automatically dimmed in response to the ambient lighting by means of a photocell. This also applies to the 10-way alarm annunciator, as well as the LCD display, which gives a 4-digit indication of motor current. The maximum dimming (darkest state) in darkness is adjustable with the “dim” key.

Like the AHD 418, this module is also based on microcontroller technology and has the following features:

• compact construction and minimal wiring costs • serial communication with the AHD 418 central unit • simple operation of the bow thruster • continuous display of motor current • programmable overcurrent limits for the individual power steps • audible and visible signalling of all alarms • automatic and adjustable dimming of the annunciators • potential-free contact for combined alarm indication and external horn

3.1 Master Operator Unit and the ON/OFF Function

The AHD 419 Operator Unit has an optocoupler input which can be used to switch the system on and off under programme control. This is done by bridging terminals (11) and (12) with an external switch, or a keyswitch. The supply voltage can remain permanently switched on, if desired.

Important: This input may only be activated on one of the available operator units. Normally the unit on the bridge is used for this purpose. It then becomes the master operator unit, thus enabling the programming function for setting the current limit values.

If the ON/OFF switching function is not required, the input on the master operator console must be permanently bridged .

3.2 Alarms and indicators

The AHD 419 has 10 illuminated annunciators, which, in addition to the visual indication of alarms are also intended to display status signals.

10 If an alarm is triggered, the relevant annunciator flashes, the internal buzzer sounds and the relay for the acoustic warning (horn relay) switches on. In the case of a sensor failure alarm, the annunciators for ‘sensor failure’ and the relevant parameter flash simultaneously. Status indications are given as a permanent light directly after activation.

Front view of the AHD 419 operator unit

11 Listed below are the various alarms and indications, together with their causes and supplementary information:

Alarm Cause Remarks ------ready for Power switch ON and master System is ready for use, provided that no serious operation operator unit is ON (terminals fault has been detected 11, 12 bridged) motortemp. Motor winding temp. > 145 °C Early warning > 145 °C motortemp. Motor winding temp. > 155 °C System shuts down. Restart only possible by > 155 °C means of reset on the AHD 418. sensor failure Sensor failure during temperature Temperature: Corresponding annunciator lights. or current measurement Current: LCD display shows 4 dashes “ - - - - “. oil level Motor oil level is too low Alarm indication overload Motor current is too high System reduces the power level by one step, or shuts down if step 1 (70%) was active. load a) Step 3 blocking is active on Status signal indicates that full power is not reduction AHD 418 available (max. 85%). b) Power reduction due to a Warning given in conjunction with overload alarm. current overload c) Power reduction due to incorrect Warning given in conjunction with system failure. acknowledgement from contactor. fan Fan acknowledgement fails on the Alarm failure AHD 418 system a) Acknowledgement from a contactor Power reduction, until a conclusive state has been failure fails established in the AHD 418. If this is not possible, the system shuts down. b) Acknowledgement received without System shuts down as this condition is activation of a contactor. indeterminate. program- Programming mode for setting the Only possible on the master operator unit. mode current limit values was selected.

3.3 Operator controls

The AHD 419 operator unit has 7 control buttons for controlling the drive steps and a further 3 buttons for the acknowledgement functions and setting the dimmer. a) Control buttons

Each direction of movement can be driven in 3 power steps. The associated control buttons are arranged on the front panel of the operator unit corresponding to the direction or movement. The STOP button is situated in the middle. After a button is pressed, the corresponding power step is engaged incrementally by the bow thruster. When the actual and desired states correspond, the selected power step button is illuminated. b) Alarm acknowledgement / horn inhibit

This button on the operator unit switches off (inhibits) the horn relay and internal buzzer when an alarm is active.

12 c) Alarm acknowledgement / optical alarm inhibit

Operation of this key causes all flashing alarms to remain permanently lit. In addition the lamp test function is invoked, i.e. all LEDs are lit and the LCD test display turns on all segments. d) Display dimming

The maximum dimming of all LEDs in darkness can be set with this key. The d i photocell makes reference to this setting and then automatically adjusts the m light intensity to suit the prevailing ambient brightness.

3.4 Programming the current limit values

Each power step is assigned a current limit value. When this is exceeded, an alarm is triggered after the delay period,. Programming can only be done via the master operator unit (terminals 11, 12 bridged). The procedure is described as follows:

1. Press and hold the 3 buttons ‘Horn’, ‘Test’ and ‘Dim’ simultaneously for 5 seconds, until the ‘Program-Mode’ annunciator lights. The STOP button will also light up and the LCD display will indicate the number of programming operations already carried out (P001 to P999).

2. Select from the port side the power step whose limit is to be changed. The limit that is currently in effect will now be shown on the LCD display.

3. The displayed value can be reduced with the starboard step 1 button and increased with the starboard step 3 button. The changes normally take place in 5A steps. If the starboard step 2 button is pressed simultaneously, the changes will occur in 50A steps.

4. Operation of the stop key causes the currently displayed value to be stored. As confirmation the stop key lights up again after approximately 2 sec., and the LCD display shows the number of completed programming operations. This number should be increased by 1 over the value previously indicated. The actual data (limit values) are transmitted serially to the AHD 418 control system and stored there.

5. Further values can now be programmed as described in step 2.

6. The programming mode can be quit at any time by pressing the ‘Horn’ button.

13 3.5 Dimensions and panel cut-out for AHD 419

41892a-e.MCD Front View Side View

192 41 37

AHD 419

ready for operation overload motortemp. load > 145°C reduction motortemp. fan > 155°C failure sensor- System- ammeter failure fehler test programm. oil level mode d i 144 m

stop Cover plate

step 3 step 2 step 1 step 1 step 2 step 3

Terminal block Electronic card Frame Desk panel O-Ring Front plate Rear View general alarm (NC) horn (NO) power supply ate serialout serial in nd screws.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 - + ON 24VDC,± 25%

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pluggable zurückschieben und Schrauben festziehen. Zum Abziehen der Steckverbindung Schrauben lösen Schrauben Steckverbindung der Abziehen Zum schieben. Pfeilrichtung in Abdeckplatte und Ursprungsposition in Abdeckplatte Zusammenbau Nach back into the original position and re-tighten the To pull off the plug connector, loosen the screws a screws the loosen connector, plug the off pull To terminal block arrow. by shown as plate holder the push pl holder the push connector, plug the re-secure To

O-Ring

192 168 84 174

4,5

12 163 This frame is fixed behind the desk panel and bolted together with the front plate. Thus, the desk panel can not be deformed during installation, which would endanger the impermeability of the O-ring.

116 Panel cut-out 131 125 144 The frame is part of delivery.

14 3.6 Technical Data

Supply voltage: 24 VDC +/- 25% Current consumption: max. 0.2 A Weight: approx. 1 kg Inputs: 2 x optocoupler for control and communication Outputs: 2 x contact 1A, 50VDC/AC for horn and combined alarm 1 x optocoupler for communication Operator inputs and outputs: 7 x membrane switches for command entry, with integral indicators 3 x membrane switches for cancel and dimmer functions 10 x dimmable annunciators for alarm and status indication 1 x 4-digit LCD display with dimmable lighting Front panel protection class: IP66 and IP67

15 4.0 Connecting the bow thruster control to a voyage recorder

4.1 Introduction

Because of increasingly stringent safety requirements and spectacular accidents and their investigations, ever more importance is attached to the recording and storage of data, even on ships. This also includes information from bow thruster installations, and was the reason for the development of the AHD 425 interface module. It is integrated into the equipment without affecting the existing components (AHD 418/419). Even failure of the module has no effect on the function of the bow thruster control.

Ease of fitting is possible even with already existing installations. This should also be borne in mind when planning an installation where data storage is not yet compulsory, as it may become necessary as a result of future legislation. If, for example, a conventional ‘multi-core’ system is installed at the time of building the ship, a retrofit becomes very expensive and will not be completed for a few hundred euros, as is the case here.

Regulation 20 of the SOLAS guidelines of January and July 2002 stipulates that the following ships must be equipped with a voyage recorder:

1. Passenger ships which were built after 01 July, 2002. 2. Ro-Ro passenger ships, which were built before 01 July, 2002 – implementation no later than at the first test/inspection/check on or after 01 July, 2002.

3. Passenger ships, other than Ro-Ro passenger ships, which were built before 01 July, 2002 - implementation no later than 01 January, 2004.

4. Ships, other than passenger ships, of 3,000 Gross Register Tons and over, which were built on or after 01 July, 2002.

In accordance with IMO 5.4.11, commands and acknowledgements must be recorded. In our case this means: ON/OFF Direction of travel Power step The AHD 425 sends a range of additional information which can likewise be stored, if desired (see page 20, 4.7).

4.2 Design The AHD 425 is microprocessor-controlled module with 5 serial inputs for data aquisition and an RS422 data output for connecting to a voyage recorder, or some other recording device. The module is designed for rail mounting (TS32 and TS35). The AHD 425 consists of a printed circuit board containing the control electronics and the necessary interfaces. All connections are made by means of a 24-way pluggable terminal strip, the sockets of which are soldered into the printed circuit board.

16 4.3 Function The purpose of this module is to acquire the data from all the implemented functions of the bow thruster control, to convert them to an IEC-61162-1 compliant protocol, and to transmit them via the RS422 interface.

The AHD 425 module monitors the data traffic between the bow thruster system and AHD 418/AHD 419. The data from the central control module AHD 418 represent the actual condition of the system. The data from the operator units AHD 419 are recorded as the desired states. Up to 5 serial data streams can be handled. The data from the control module AHD 418 and a maximum of 4 AHD 419 control units are simultaneously processed, converted to a dedicated IEC 61162-1 compliant protocol (see p. 20) and transmitted via the RS422 interface. Galvanic insulation of the RS422 interface avoids problems with cross- coupling or potential differences.

The complete record consists of an ASCII text line and is sent immediately after any change in status. If nothing changes in the status, then a periodic output is made after a DIP switch settable time interval (see 4.4.3). The record can then be stored, read and analysed by, for example, a voyage recorder.

For correct analysis, the AHD 425 module requires information about the number of operator units connected. This number is similarly set by means of DIP switches (see 4.4.3).

4.4 Installation and commissioning

4.4.1 Fitting The AHD 425 module is best mounted in the bridge console, where the terminals are then available for simultaneous distribution to the AHD 418 central control module and the AHD 419 operator units (see last page of this document). It is mounted on an existing TS32/TS35 rail. To avoid lateral movement, e.g. by mechanical vibration, commercially available mounts can be used, or if necessary a ground terminal on one side.

4.4.2 Equipment wiring The serial connections of all the modules are looped through the AHD 425, which also distributes the power supply.

In most applications, 3 operator units for port, bridge and starboard respectively are envisaged. The front panel legend is laid out with this in mind, i.e. the connections can be implemented exactly as per the connection diagram. The AHD 419 option terminals are unused. The number of operator units must be set to 3 with the DIP switches (see 4.4.3). If only 2 operator units are used, then the connections for port and bridge are to be used. The number is then set to 2. If only 1 operator unit is used, then this must be connected to the bridge terminals and the number set to 1.

17 4.4.3 DIP switch setting

Prior to installation, the DIP switch settings must be checked and reset if necessary. Switches 1 and 2 set the number of attached operator units (1...4). Switches 3 and 4 set the cycle interval within which the equipment sends messages via the RS422 interface. This time interval applies if no changes in status occur. Should one of the data sources fail, the intervals can be greater than indicated.

The following settings are provided for:

Switch 1 = OFF Switch 2 = OFF: 1 Operator Unit AHD 419 (Bridge) Switch 1 = ON Switch 2 = OFF: 2 Operator Units AHD 419 (Bridge, Pt) Switch 1 = OFF Switch 2 = ON: 3 Operator Units AHD 419 (Bridge, Pt, Stbd) *) Switch 1 = ON Switch 2 = ON: 4 Operator Units AHD 419 (Bridge, Pt, Stbd, Opt.)

Switch 3 = OFF Switch 4 = OFF: Cycle interval = 10 sec. *) Switch 3 = ON Switch 4 = OFF: Cycle interval = 30 sec. Switch 3 = OFF Switch 4 = ON: Cycle interval = 60 sec. Switch 3 = ON Switch 4 = ON: Cycle interval = 1 sec. (Test only)

*) Factory default settings

Front view

View of the red 4-way DIP switch

18 4.5 Technical data

Inputs: 5 x serial I/P optically insulated (min. 1 kV) Outputs: 1 x RS422 galvanically insulated (min. 1 kV) RS232 interface also available on request Supply: 18 – 30VDC, max. 0.5 A Protection class: IP00

4.6 AHD 425 dimensions

4899b-e.mcd

135 pluggable terminal blocks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Tx- Tx+ 55

mountable on rail TS32 and TS35

BÖNING Type AHD 425 Power supply 24 VDC Failure 78 s.o. AHD419 port so AHD 419 bridge s.o. AHD419 stb. s.o. AHD419 (add.) s.o. AHD418 Power

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Tx- Tx+

19 4.7 Serial output protocol

ahd425e.mcd

The actual value of the bow thruster, as well as the requests from the operating units for the nominal values, are registered with Module AHD425 and put out over an RS422-interface. Data output is done serially according to IEC 61162-1 (proprietary protocol).

Interface: RS422 galvanically separated (min. 1kV)/4800 Baud/8 Data/1 Stop (scheduling is done by the recipient) Record layout/protocol: $PBOE,BSR,x,A,x,hh,hh,hh,hh,hh,hh,hh,hh*hh Checksum according to IEC61162 Status operating unit 4 - AHD419 (add.) *) Status operating unit 3 - AHD419 stb. *) Status operating unit 2 - AHD419 port *) Status operating unit 1 - AHD419 bridge *) D7: Request switch on bow thruster (main switch at AD419) D6: Request activation BB stage 1 D5: Request activation BB stage 2 D4: Request activation BB stage 3 D3: Request stop D2: Request activation STB stage 1 D1: Request activation STB stage 2 D0: Request activation STB stage 3 *) In the event of failure of an operating unit, all relevant bits are set on Hi; then, the transmitted value is 0FF(hex)! Control unit AHD418 - status-byte 4 (8-bit-value) Actual value actual current - standardization x 8 Range: 0..255 corresponds to 0..2040 Ampere Control unit AHD418 - status-byte 3 (set bit = active status) D7: Locking stage 3 activated D6: Sensor failure -> 155°C-temperature-sensor D5: Sensor failure -> 145°C-temperature-sensor D4: Power switch active D3: Program-mode active D2: Status-report: bow thruster power switch (AHD419) on D1: Optics ackn. active D0: Horn ackn. active Control unit AHD418 - status-byte 2 (set bit = active status) D7: Alarm -> oil level too low D6: Alarm -> temperature lower than 145°C D5: Alarm -> temperature lower than 155°C D4: Sensor failure -> current registration D3: Alarm -> bow thruster overload D2: Status-report -> performance is reduced D1: Alarm -> fan failure D0: Alarm -> general system failure Control unit AHD418 - status-byte 1 (set bit = active status) D7: not used (always Lo) D6: Status-report (actual status) -> BB stage 1 is active D5: Status-report (actual status) -> BB stage 2 is active D4: Status-report (actual status) -> BB stage 3 is active D3: Status-report (actual status) -> bowthruster stop D2: Status-report (actual status) -> STB stage 1 is active D1: Status-report (actual status) -> STB stage 2 is active D0: Status-report (actual status) -> STB stage 3 is active Number of consecutive bytes (one digit hex. 0..F): here defined = 8

Error status (one ASCII-character): A = valid/V = invalid Status invalid, if AHD425 does not receive any data from AHD418. Consecutive number bow thruster system (one digit hex. 0..F): here defined = 1

System-code (3 ASCII-characters): here defined = BSR (bow thruster)

Header/company-code (3 ASCII-characters): BOE = (company: Boening GmbH) - Each record is finished with and (0Dh,0Ah).

Example 1: $PBOE,BSR,1,A,8,08,00,14,00,80,00,00,00*16 => Basic status after activation: (system stop, power switch active, main switch is on, current = 0, request main switch on from bridge (operating unit 1) Example 2: $PBOE,BSR,1,A,8,20,00,14,37,80,00,00,00*18 => System is running on port stage 2, current = 470..447 Ampere

20 5.0 Connection diagram for installations without a voyage recorder

41891-1e.MCD Wing Bridge Wing

Operating and Display Units AHD 419 Collect. alarm (NC) Collect. alarm (NC) Collect. alarm (NC) Horn (NO) Horn (NO) Horn (NO) Power supply Power supply Power supply electronics electronics electronics Serial in Serial in Seriell out Serial in Serial out Serial out Serial out

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 - - + + N' ON FN2080-3-06 Schaffner-Filter mount filter on groundedsurface P N - + P' Bow thruster control is commissioned withthe ON-switch andthe performanceswitch. 24VDC, ± 25%

Central Control Module AHD 418

Attention: unused wires within a cable must be earthed! Locking stage3, ifcontact isclosed. Contactor 100% Reserve contactor Cont. interm. stage 1 Cont. interm. stage 2 Cont. interm. stage 3 Cont. interm. stage 4 Cont. interm. stage 5 Cont. interm. stage 6 Fan contactor Contactor 70% Turn. contactor Stb. Turn. contactorPt. Contactor 85% 230VAC

- +

72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 locking ofelectronics performance switch on serial input stage3 powersupply serial output 70% 85% Fan 100% Reserve TypeAHD 418 Turn. contact.Pt. Interm. stage 1 Interm. stage 2 Interm. stage 3 Interm. stage 4 Interm. stage 5 Interm. stage 6 Turn. contactor Stb. Reset overtemp. (155°C) (155°C) temp. Oil Oil level (NC) Eng. overvoltage Eng. curr.registration Sensor failure Eng. temp.> 145°C Eng. temp.> 155°C Engine temp. Sensorfailure

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 PTC PTC I I tactor 100% tactor Stb. tactor (155°C) ertemp. contactor Pt. tactor urrent tactor 70% tactor 85 % tactor t. interm. stage 1 t. interm. stage 2 t. interm. stage 3 t. interm. stage 4 t. interm. stage 5 t. interm. stage 6 t. interm. erve contactor 100% contactor erve 145°C emperature 155°C emperature

t t v n n c n n n n n n n n n s

21 5.1 Connection diagram for installations with a voyage recorder

Control and Display Units AHD 419 Wing Stb. Bridge Wing Pt. 41891D1e.mcd

AHD 425 Collective alarm (NC) Collective alarm (NC) Collective alarm (NC) Horn (NO) Horn (NO) Horn (NO) electronics Supply of electronics electronics electronics Supply of Supply of Supply of Serial in Serial in Serial in Serial out Serial out Serial out - + - - - - - + + + + +

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Tx+ Tx- ON The bow thruster bowThe is control closing commissioned byof On-switch andthethe Power- switch. Facility for connection of a of connection for Facility AHD 419 unit 4th operating VOYAGE-RECORDER (RS422)

N' N Schaffner-Filter - + Central Control Module AHD 418 P' FN2080-3-06 P

Mount filter on grounded 25% 24VDC,± in the bow thruster room surface! Contactor 100% Reserve contactor Contactor interm. stage 1 Contactor interm. stage 2 Contactor interm. stage 3 Contactor interm. stage 4 Contactor interm. stage 5 Contactor interm. stage 6 Fan contactor Contactor 70% Turning contactor pt. Turning contactor stb. Contactor 85% Attention: idle wires within a 230VAC cable must be grounded. Locking stage 3 if contact is closed.

- +

72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 Power- switch on Serial input Locking stage 3 electronics Serial output Supply of 70% 85% 100% Fan Reserve Type AHD 418 AHD Type Turn. contactor pt. Turn. Turn. contactor stb. Interm. stage 1 Interm. stage 2 Interm. stage 3 Interm. stage 4 Interm. stage 5 Interm. stage 6

Resetover- temp. (155°C) temp.(155°C) Oil(NC) level Engine overcurrent Engine curr. registr. sensor failure Eng. temp.> 145°C Eng. temp.> 155°C Eng. temp. sensor failure

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 PTC PTC I I rtemp. (155°C) rtemp.(155°C) rrent cont.from 100% res.from cont. 100% from turn. cont. pt. cromturn. cont. stb. fanfrom contactor fromcont. 70% fromcont. % 85 fr. cont. interm.st. 1 fr. cont. interm.st. 2 fr. cont. interm.st. 3 fr. cont. interm.st. 4 fr. cont. interm.st. 5 fr. cont. interm.st. 6 mperature145°C mperature155°C k k k e k u k k k k k k k k k e e 22

bugvs-e.mcd BOW THRUSTER CONTROL WITH VARIABLE PITCH PROPELLER AHD 903BS

40-pole ribbon cable 14-pole ribbon cable pluggable on both sides Covering pluggable on both sides

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39

Transfer station Analog station AHD 903-15 Relay station AHD 903R

Rail TS 32 or 35

Accelerator

4 wires incl.power supply Wing pt. Bridge Wing stb.

40-pole ribbon cable 14-pole ribbon cable pluggable on both sides Covering pluggable on both sides

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39

Transfer station Analog station AHD 903-15 Output unit AHD 903IP

Rail TS 32 or 35

For display at the control desks Impulse length controlled magnetic valves

Actual-value-registration

1 Control for bow thruster with variable pitch propeller AHD 903BS 903bsi-e

Contents

Page

1. Construction 3 2. Control units 3 3. Bow thruster 4 4. Failure report 4 5. Commissioning 4

Terminal diagram 8 Dimensional drawing 9 Technical data 9

2 Control for bow thruster with variable pitch propeller AHD 903BS

1180-1i-e.DOC

1. Construction

The system for controlling a bow thruster with variable pitch propeller consists of two units. The operating unit for the three control units is located on the bridge, the control unit for propeller adjustment at the bow thruster. Both units communicate serially with each other and are connected by means of four wires (incl. power supply). They consist of similar analogue data stations AHD 903-15. An additional relay module AHD 903R is used on the bridge and a module AHD 903IP, as well as two further relays, are used for impulse length control on the bow thruster side.

2. Control units

The operating unit on the bridge receives the inputs from the main control unit, as well as from two wing control units on port and starboard. The default angle for propeller adjustment is registered and evaluated by means of a potentiometer (joystick with 0-positon in the middle).

Following activation, the system can only be operated from the bridge control unit. Prior to propeller drive being engaged at the bow thruster side (relay K3), the selector switch for operation has to be in position ‘bridge’ and the potentiometer has to be in position ‘0’ (micro- contact). As long as these conditions are not fulfilled, the lamp ‘ready for operation’ at the bridge control unit signalises this by slow flashing in a 1.5-seconds-cycle. Once the start function is enabled, the flashing light becomes permanently illuminated.

Adjustment of the bow thruster angle is carried out by means of a 3-point follower by comparison of target value (joystick) and actual value (controller at the bow thruster).

If, during operation, manoeuvering shall be continued from one of the wing control units, the selector switch for operation at the main control unit has to be switched into the appropriate position (port or starboard). Then, the takeover-button at the wing control unit has to be pushed, which causes the lamp ‘ready for operation’ to flash. Actual takeover does not take place until the target value at the wing control unit (joystick position) is the same as the actual value recorded. As long as this is not the case, operation of the bow thruster will be continued from the bridge control unit, even if the selector switch for operation is in starboard or port position. When the conditions for takeover at the wing control unit are fulfilled, the flashing lamp ‘ready for operation’ lights permanently and the system can now be operated from the wing. If synchronisation between target and actual value has not taken place within ten minutes, the flashing lamp ‘ready for operation’ at the wing control unit is extinguished. In this case, the takeover operation would have to be repeated.

Feedback of the command inputs from wing to bridge is carried out in the same way as described above. The selector switch for operation has to be switched into position ‘bridge/main control unit’ and the takeover button has to be depressed. Once again, for correct takeover the target value must correspond to the actual value.

Each control unit indicates the actual value of the propeller angle. For safety reasons, this signal is led separately from the system and activated directly by the actual value potentiometer at the bow thruster.

3 3. Bow thruster

On the bow thruster side, the target value settings are received serially by the operating unit and the relevant proportional magnet valves are activated via a servo governor (impulse length control). The actual analogue value of the propeller angle is fed back and evaluated.

If the difference between target and actual position is too great, the relevant transistor output (increase or decrease angle) will provide maximum power. The actual value now tracks and approaches the target value. Within this now narrow range, the two proportional solenoid valves are activated by the impulse lengths, leading to a stable condition when the system is deactivated (actual value = target value).

This narrowed range must be regarded as positive and negative offset around the actual value. Its prescribed value corresponds to a certain angle which can be adjusted by means of 6 DIP switches on the circuit board in the terminal box. Two criteria have to be considered: a) The smaller the range chosen, the more precisely the actual value is adjusted to the target value. b) On the other hand, the value chosen should be high enough to allow compensation (in the relevant system) for deviations within the narrowed range caused by possible oil leakages.

The solenoid valves do not open until a minimum current is reached. The minimum current is usually 20% of the rated current. This minimum current can be adjusted with a special DIP switch. a) Level 1 = 16% minimum current, which means that the valve is still closed at the start of the control range. b) Level 2 = 24% minimum current, which means that the valve is always opened a little at the start of the control range.

The solenoid valves are only activated in connection with enabled start function. The conditions for enabled start function are as described above.

4. Failure report

Relay K4 serves for failure report at the bridge side, as well as at the bow thruster side. An open contact signalises a failure, missing configuration (see setup) or wire breakage and can thus be evanluated or indicated correspondingly. Additionally, in case of failure, the start release is cancelled and the solenoid valves are switched to idle.

5. Commissioning

In order to make the system ready for operation, it has to be programmed via the integrated adjustment software. If programming has not yet been done, the system can not work. In this case, the failure relay K4 is activated when the device is switched on and the lamp ‘ready for operation’ on the bridge flashes in a 5-second cycle: one second on, four seconds off. Thus, the user is reminded optically to do the programming.

4 On request, the system can be pre-configured ex-works. Thus, the system is ready for operation immediately after switching on, but this is only feasible if the exact adjustment values are known (e. g. for replacement parts provided the adjustment values are known).

During programming, the target and actual value positions of the potentiometers are coordinated. For this purpose, the limit positions of the adjustable pitch propeller have to be reached and the corresponding positions of the potentiometers have to be saved. Please programme as follows:

1. Switch off power supply. To activate the programming mode, terminals 37 and 38 of the unit which is installed on the bridge have to be connected via a jumper.

2. Now switch on the power supply. The lamp ‘ready for operation’ on the bridge control unit should flash rapidly with two flashes per second. This signalises the activated programming mode.

3. The selector switch for operation from the bridge control unit is now turned to position ‘port’ to adjust to the first limiting position. ‘Port’ now stands for max. negative propeller angle.

4. Correspondingly, now the max. negative propeller angle is directly adjusted by manual or emergency control of the bow thruster.

5. Then, the target value controllers (joysticks) of all three control units are switched into position ‘max. negative propeller angle’ (bottom position).

6. After rechecking the three previous instructions, the relevant controller positions for this limiting position can now be saved. For this purpose, the takeover-button in the bridge control unit has to be depressed for approx. 1 sec. After releasing this button, the lamp ‘ready for operation’ lights up for approx. 2 sec., providing optical acknowledgement of programming.

7. To adjust the second limiting position, the selector switch for operation is switched to position ‘starboard’ (‘starboard’ now indicates max. positive propeller angle).

8. Now the max. positive propeller angle is adjusted by manual or emergency control.

9. The controllers (joysticks) of the three control units are then adjusted to the corresponding position “max. positive propeller angle” (top position).

10. The programming of this limiting position is now carried out as described under 6 above. (depressing the takeover-button for approx. 1 sec.).

11. Finally, the neutral position is adjusted. For this purpose, the selector switch for operation is switched to position ‘bridge’ (‘bridge’ now indicates neutral position).

12. Now, the neutral position (angle = zero) is adjusted by manual or emergency control.

13. The potentiometers (joysticks) of the three control units are adjusted to positon ‘angle zero’. While doing this, the programmer should check that the micro-switch mechanically linked with the bridge control really closes at ‘neutral position’, as otherwise the neutral position can not be adjusted.

5 14. Programming of the neutral position is now carried out as described under 6 above. (depressing the takeover-button for app. 1 sec.). If there is no optic acknowledgement (light on for 2 sec.), the micro-switch ‘neutral position’ at the controller of the bridge control unit is not closed. Please check again.

15. The jumper between terminals 37 and 38 is now removed to exit the programming mode. The power supply can remain switched on during this procedure. In case of correct programming, normal operation starts immediately.

Following each programming step and every activation, the software checks the conclusiveness of all programmed adjusting values. If they are not conclusive (e.g. min. value higher than max. value), the failure relay K4 is activated and the lamp ‘ready for operation’ flashes in a 5-second cycle; 1 sec. on, 4 sec. off.

Possible mistakes are, e.g. wrong wiring of the exterior controller connections (at max. positive propeller angle the voltage at the slider has to be higher than in the neutral position) or incorrect use of the selector switch (operation), whose labelling has a different meaning during programming. In the event of such a mistake, the whole programming procedure has to be repeated. The same applies if there is a power failure during the programming phase.

If necessary, a new adjustment can be carried out later at any time. Here, it is also possible to program only single positions, e. g. only position angle zero --> following instructions 1, 2, 11 to 15.

If the saved adjustment parameters are to be written down, the installed EEPROM has to be removed and read with a separate programming device.

DIP-Switch on Additional Module AHD 903IP

Ansicht auf die Ausgabeein- SW 2 SW 1 View of the output-unit 4321 321 heit AHD 903IP von oben ohneAHDA 903IPbdeckung from above without cover. DIP-SchalterDip-switch SW1, SW 1, SW2 SW2 zurfor Einstellungadjustment des of Nah- bereichsminimum range

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The extent of the narrowed range can be specified qualitatively as binary value with 6 DIP- switches in a range of 0-63. The value is proportional to the adjustable angle and has to be adjusted interactively depending on the overall arrangement. The narrowed range is adjusted to the value 32 ex works.

6 DIP-switch values: ON = binary low OFF = binary high SW1 – switch 2 corresponds to the most significant byte (value = 32)... SW2 – switch 4 corresponds to the least significant byte (value = 1)

Example: SW1-S2(32) = OFF Byte = High Proportion of total value = 32 SW1-S3(16) = ON Byte = Low No proportion SW2-S1(8) = OFF Byte = High Proportion of total value = 8 SW2-S2(4) = OFF Byte = High Proportion of total value = 4 SW2-S3(2) = ON Byte = Low No proportion SW2-S4(1) = OFF Byte = High Proportion of total value = 1

Therefore, the total value of the narrowed range is 45.

The min. current for the proportional solenoid valves is adjusted with the SW 1 - switch 1:

ON Imin = 16% of target current OFF Imin = 24% of target current

7 Failure (NC) Failure

K4 Start release Start

1180-10e.MCD AHD903IP

K3 -

angle smaller angle

output

pulse length- pulse angle larger angle 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 Adjustable pitch Adjustable propeller control propeller 24VDC Ribbon cable Ribboncable + - 1180-10e AHD 903-15 2728 29 30 31 32 33 34 3536 37 38 39 40 IMPORTANT: All potentiometers = 2 ... 2.5 kOhm At max. positive angle,the voltage at all potentio meter-sliders has to be app. 10 ...12 Volts ! 1.5A permanent voltage 5 A short-term (5s) Power transistors optically deconnected perm. load: Ribboncable 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Adjustable angle actual value

serial connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1

(DIMMER) 24VDC

+ - Failure (NC) Failure Act.value Indication K4

AHD903R Takeover Operation/

K1 K2 K3

1 1 2 3 45 6 78 Takeover Lamp test Lamp

Ribbon cable Ribbon Nom.position

bridge

In progr.In mode

Takeover Operation/

AHD 903-15

Takeover Lamp test Lamp

27 28 2930 31 32 33 34 35 36 3738 39 40 Nom.position

Ribbon cable

Takeover Operation/

5 165 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Takeover Lamp test Lamp

BRIDGE BB. Wing Panel STB. Wing Pan

Nom.position

Stb.

0-Position Br.

Bb. - 24VDC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 141 +

8 Longhole diameter. 5,5 diameter. Longhole 903ver-e.MCD with adjustable pitch propeller Controlfor bow thruster AHD 903BS 15 x 15 analog/binary 1TTY bidirectionalx (current loop) 1 2 3 4 5 6 17 2 8 : 1.5kg : 24VDC +/-25% : app. 0.15 A : 1 A : 1.5 Apermanent current, 5A short-term (5s) : 99% : : pluggable from both sides 14-pole ribbon cable ribbon 14-pole Relay Station AHD 903R AHD Station Relay or Output Unit AHD 903IP AHD Unit Output or 903ver-e TECHNICAL DATA: Power supply Power cons. ofelectronics Perm. load of relay contacts Perm load of transistors Inputs Serial interface Perm. rel. air humidity Weight Rail TS 35 or 35 or 35 TS Rail 357 380 40-pole ribbon cable ribbon 40-pole pluggable from both sides Covering switching station switching 903-15 AHD Station Data Analog 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 31 33 35 372739 29 View of Output Unit AHD 903IP from above without covering. DIP-switch SWSW2 1, for adjustmentthe of near- limiting-value-range

10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 34 36 382840 32

deep 110 1 3 5 7 9 2 2 4 6 8 1 2 3 SW 1 SW 1 2 3

SW 2 SW 1 12 3 45 6 7 8 60

9 EXHAUST GAS AVERAGE VALUE CONTROL FOR DIESEL ENGINES abgmkat.doc EFFICIENT MODULAR FLEXIBLE ROBUST EASY INSTALLATION ECONOMIC

LCD-monitor AHD 524 for console installation with front dimensions of 194mm x 146mm; for display of all relevant exhaust gas data on one page; one page per engine for more than one engine drive. Pages called up via +/- keys. Degree of protection IP 54 is obtained.

Data station AHD 903-15 for rail mounting; with connected relay unit AHD 903-R ; for calculation of exhaust gas temperatures with ambient temperature compensation and average value divergence, minimal and economic wiring due to serial data transmission to monitor AHD 524 by means of only 4 wires including power supply; Device is approved by GL for installation in engine terminal box.

Amplifier unit AHD 903V for rail mounting; for amplification of up to 14 thermocouplers NiCrNi and transmission of voltages to data station AHD 903-15; Device is approved by GL for installation in engine terminal box.

Diesel engine with NiCrNi thermocouplers for exhaust gas temperature measurement (other sensors on request).

CONTENTS

Page

1. General features 3 2. Design 3 3. Function 3 3.1 Amplification of thermovoltages 3 3.2 Processing of amplified thermovoltages 3 3.3 Display on the monitor 4 3.4 Sensor failure 5 3.5 Relay functions 5

4. Arbitrarily selectable parameters of the exhaust gas average value control system 5

5. Description of the single devices 6 5.1 Thermocoupler amplifier AHD 903 V 6 5.2 Analogue data station AHD 903-15 8 5.3 LCD-monitor AHD 524 10 5.3.1 General features 10 5.3.2 Construction of device 10 5.3.3 Function 10 5.3.4 Interfaces 11

6. Commissioning of the exhaust gas average value control system 13 6.1 General features 13 6.2 Activating the system 13 6.3 Programming by means of external keyboard type PC Mini 5 13

Measuring point list 17 Terminal diagram 18

2 1. General features

The exhaust gas average value control system for diesel engines is part of the decentralized alarm system DZA 02 and is of modular construction. It is highly flexible, of small dimensions and is easy to install (also in existing systems). Due to the application of standard devices and serial data transmission, it is very economic. Within any one system, 14 measuring points can be processed, e.g. 12 cylinders plus one in front of and one behind the turbocharger. For engines with more measuring points (e.g. 16-cylinder V engines), just one side of the engine is considered to be a complete engine.

2. Design

A typical system with NiCrNi-thermocouplers for temperature sensors comprises the following components:

- Amplifier unit AHD 903V for amplification of up to 14 NiCrNi-thermocouplers by factor 100 - Data station AHD 903-15 for registration of the amplified thermovoltages and calculation of all relevant parameters, as well as for ambient temperature compensation with a temperature sensor that is included as standard.

- Relay unit AHD 903R for distribution of the following selectable information (see measuring point list):

exhaust gas average value divergence cylinder temperature max. temperature exceeded in front of or behind turbocharger collective alarm

- LCD-monitor AHD 524 for display of all relevant exhaust gas average temperatures and/or their limiting values.

- Membrane keyboard for setting of limiting values, e.g. during commissioning.

3. Function

3.1 Amplification of thermovoltages

The amplifier unit AHD 903V amplifies the thermovoltages by a factor of 100. That means that a temperature divergence range of 0°C to 600°C between the thermocouplers and the terminal block of the amplifier results in an output voltage of 0 V to 2.49 V. To determine the actual exhaust gas temperature, the ambient temperature has to be added. The ambient temperature is measured and analyzed by analogue data station AHD 903-15 with a sensor that is included as standard.

3.2 Processing of amplified thermovoltages

The amplified thermovoltages are transferred to analogue data station AHD 903-15. This device is equipped with a special software that operates as an exhaust gas average value control system.

All cylinder temperatures are measured and their average value is calculated. Beneath an adjustable average value temperature, the so-called blocking range starts, in which no alarm is triggered. Above this limit, the average value is compared with the permitted limiting values of plus and minus divergence. When a limiting value is reached, an exhaust gas average value alarm is released. The permitted divergences can be set arbitrarily in accordance with the exhaust gas average value temperature. Usually, in the lower value range larger divergences are permitted than for higher average value temperatures, which, when illustrated, leads to the classic trumpet-shape. At the upper end, the ‘trumpet’ is limited by the maximum permitted cylinder temperature. The position of the 4 corner points of the ‘trumpet’ can all be determined separately by setting the values A, B, X and Y (see drawing 1).

3 Due to unavoidable tolerances, even when engine is running smoothly, not all cylinder temperatures are equal. This has to be taken into consideration, when the exhaust gas temperatures are analyzed, by carrying out a mathematical adjustment. This should be done in the higher performance range (e.g. nominal load) and with smoothly running engine (see commissioning). At the moment of the adjustment, all cylinder temperatures are equalized mathematically and match the actual average value. Thus, false alarms are avoided. These can occur e.g. because the temperature of any one cylinder, which may already be in smooth working condition closer to a limiting curve than the average value, exceeds or falls below the alarm value.

The maximum cylinder temperatures and the maximum temperatures in front of and behind the turbocharger are also adjustable.

Drawing 1, Definition of the permitted range of the exhaustabgas-e.mcd gas average value control

e lu va e ag

Driving power Driving r ve a as g st au xh e ed ch at m ly al ic at m he at m

Blocking range (no exhaust gas alarms) T (°C) max. Cylinder temp.

3.3 Display on the monitor

BÖNING AHD 524 TAFEL 4 : E MIN IST MAX ZYLINDER 1 °C 32 462 38 ZYLINDER 2 °C 30 460 40 ZYLINDER 3 °C 35 465 35 ZYLINDER 4 °C 33 463 37 ZYLINDER 5 °C 32 462 38 ZYLINDER 6 °C 35 465 35 ZYLINDER 7 °C 31 461 39 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 DRUCK ZYLINDER 8 °C 37 467 33 A B C D E F G ZYLINDER 9 °C 30 460 40 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 PAUSE ZYLINDER 10 °C 33 463 37 H I J K L M N ZYLINDER 11 °C 31 461 39 ( ) = % Ä Ö Ü ZYLINDER 12 °C 35 465 35 O Q R S T U VOR TURBO °C 372 400 P NACH TURBO °C 365 400 ` " ! § $ / ? V W X Y Z \ ß MITTELWERT °C 35 463 35 ; 7 8 9 * ' MAX ZYLINDERTEMP. °C 500 , Pos 1 Bild + # BLOCKIERBEREICH °C 200 _ SPACE 4 5 6 > - < : ON INFO + - DIM CONTRAST Strg 1 2 3 ESC Ende Bild .

Funct 0 ' NUM ALT Enter Einf. Entf.

4 An engine with up to 12 cylinders can be displayed on one monitor page together with the measuring points in front of and behind turbocharger. Furthermore, the actual average value temperature and the maximum permitted cylinder temperature as well as the blocking range are displayed. For engines with more cylinders, a second page is necessary. Paging on the monitor is carried out with the keys ‘+’ and ‘-‘. This solution can also be used for more than one engine drive. Here, not every engine has its own monitor, but every engine has its own page or pages.

The cylinder temperatures can be read in the IS-column. In the MIN-column, the gap between the relevant cylinder temperature and the exhaust gas average value alarm, is represented by a negative temperature divergence. If, in this example, the temperature of cylinder 2 were to drop by 30°C or more, this would cause an exhaust gas average value alarm. The same applies for the MAX-column in case of a positive divergence. A low value in the MIN- or MAX-column therefore indicates the danger of an average value alarm.

3.4 Sensor failure

The registration of possible sensor failures is based on the fact that, under normal operating conditions (above the blocking range temperature), a sudden, drastic fall in temperature down to values close to the ambient temperature cannot occur. In case of such a sudden fall in temperature, it can therefore be assumed that there is a wire break or a sensor failure. The relevant exhaust gas sensor is now automatically excluded from the average value calculation. The display shows the value ‘0’.

In case of a failure of the ambient temperature sensor, the internal processing is carried out at a simulated temperature of approx. 30°C.

3.5 Relay functions

A relay module type AHD 903R with 4 group relays is attached next to the analogue data station AHD 903-15. Both units are connected by a 14-pole ribbon cable. To each relay (k1 to k4), the following alarms can be assigned:

1. Exhaust gas average value divergence 2. Temperature in front of turbo max 3. Temperature behind turbo max 4. Cylinder temperature max 5. Collective report from 1 to 4 6. Collective report sensor failure 7. Collective report 1 to 6

Each of the mentioned relays can also be defined as normally open or normally closed. The relay is in its normal operating condition when no alarm assigned to this relay is active. Furthermore, every relay can operate as first-value indicator or new-value indicator. First-value indicator means, a relay is activated when one of the alarms assigned to it is released. If a second alarm assigned to this relay is triggered, the relay remains in the same state. New-value indicator means that in the same case the respective relay first switches back to its normal state for 2 seconds when the second alarm assigned to this relay is triggered (collective alarm repetition) and then is reactivated.

4. Arbitrarily selectable parameters of the exhaust gas average value control system

The exhaust gas average value control system is usually programmed ex works. This is based on the measuring point list that is part of the documentation and in which the customer specifies the project specific parameters. Depending on the amount of cylinders and other measuring points, the LCD- monitor is loaded with a corresponding mask before delivery. The other parameters, which are mentioned below, can also be changed later by the customer, e.g. during commissioning.

5 End of blocking range (start of monitoring) maximum cylinder temperature maximum average value divergence from end of blocking range to direction ‘plus’ (see A in fig. 1) maximum average value divergence from end of blocking range to direction ‘minus’ (see B in fig. 1) maximum average value divergence at cylinder temperature to direction ‘plus’ (see Y in fig. 1) maximum average value divergence at cylinder temperature to direction ‘minus’ (see X in fig. 1)

A keyboard is also included as standard and can be plugged into the rear-side of the monitor. A menu that is part of the system program of the LCD-monitor can be called up by using the keyboard. It guides the user and thus enables an easy adjustment of the parameters to the specific requirements of the system. The keyboard must also be used to carry out mathematical adjustment of the cylinder temperatures, as described under 3.2. All parameters of the exhaust gas average value control system are saved in the data station AHD 903-15 and in the LCD-monitor AHD 524. This also applies for changes made later, e.g. during commissioning. The exhaust gas average value control system will still work if the monitor is removed or defective.

5. Description of the individual devices

5.1 Thermocoupler amplifier AHD 903 V

AHD 903 V consists of 14 independent precision amplifiers. It is mostly used for NiCrNi-thermocouplers in connection with exhaust gas temperature measuring of diesel engines. The amplification factor is 100 (also see item 3.1 of this description).

The device is designed for rail mounting and is approved by GL for installation in the engine terminal box. AHD 903 V consists of an electronic unit and one substation each for input of the thermocouplers and output of the amplified signals. Ribbon cables connect the electronic unit with the substation.

Input (connection of thermocouplers)

Electronic unit Output of amplified thermovoltages

6 903v-1-e.mcd Thermocouple Amplifier AHD 903 V All plug-in connections of the ribbon cables are equipped with DIMENSIONAL DRAWING strain relief acc. DIN 41651 110

34-pole ribbon cable 16-pole ribbon cable AHD 903V 24VDC 80 50

115 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Typ Type Spannung Power supply Geräte-Nr. Device-no. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 60

115

Mountable on rails TS 32 and TS 35

2 4 6 8 10 12 1416 1820 22 24 2628 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 10 12 1416

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1517 1921 23 25 2729 31 33 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 60 60

AHD 903 V AMPLIFIER FOR Terminal diagram 34-pole ribbon cable14 THERMOCOUPLES 16-pole ribbon cable NiCrNi

AMPLIFYING FACTOR : 100

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 + - + - 1 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 3 4 5 6 7 8 ground (-) TECHNICAL DATA 24VDC±25% Input

Power supply : 24 VDC +/- 25 % Outputtocorresp. terminalno. Power cons. of the electronics : app. 0.2 A Inputs : 14 x thermocoupler NiCrNi Outputs : 14 x 0 to 2.52V equivalent to app. 0 to 600°C, not compensated Amplification : 101 Weight : 0.5 kg Protection class : IP 00 Perm. ambient temperature : 0 to 70°C Max. relative air humidity : 99%

7 5.2 Analogue data station AHD 903-15

AHD 903-5 is an electronic, microprocessor controlled system. It registers and processes up to 15 analogue signals. The device is designed for rail mounting and is usually installed in a control box or console. It is approved by GL for installation in diesel engine terminal boxes. AHD 903-15 consists of an electronic unit and a 40-pole substation for connection of in- and outputs. The relay station AHD 903R is connected additionally for output of exhaust gas alarms or sensor failures. Ribbon cables are used to connect up the individual devices.

Up to ten of these units (150 signals) can be connected to an LCD monitor via a 2-wire bus system and be displayed as graphic or as text. Besides a general software, there are a couple of special solutions which come with their own integrated software packages. Among these special solutions is the exhaust gas average value control. Currently, a text-oriented version is used for display on the LCD monitor.

Substation Electronic unit Relay station AHD 903R

An extensive documentation can be obtained on request.

8 DIMENSIONAL DRAWING 903-1-b.mcd

40-pole terminal block Analog data station AHD 903-15 Relay unit AHD 903R (optional) 113 146 68

Ribbon cable Ribbon cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 1820 22 24 2628 30 32 3436 38 40 58 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1517 1921 23 25 2729 31 33 3537 39 56 56

mountable on rail TS 32 and TS 35

Plug-in connection with strain relief, acc. to DIN 41651

Ribbon cable 78 78 115 Type AHD 903-15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 Power supply 24VDC Device No. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 System address

TERMINAL DIAGRAM

Ribbon cable

AHD 903-15

2x 0.63 Amtr AHD 903R

K1 K2 K3 K4

Flachbandkabel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 + - Input no.

24VDC±25% serial transmission to display AHD 524

serial reception from display AHD 524

9 5.3 LCD monitor AHD 524

5.3.1 General features

AHD 524 is a microprocessor controlled device which in this case is used to display and program the exhaust gas average value control.

It is possible to connect an arbitrary number of further displays (bridge, chambers, mess, ....) by means of a one wire connection plus power supply. The operation of the individual devices is independent of each other.

5.3.2 Construction of device

The LCD-monitor is a device for dashboard installation with the front dimensions 192mm x 144mm and an installation depth of 75mm. It essentially consists of two electronic cards. The display is attached to one card fastened to the front panel and the other is fastened to the inside of the rear panel. Both cards are interconnected.

The panel front is made of black anodized aluminium. A front cover is supplied to increase the degree of protection (IP 54). It is operated by buttons installed in the front panel next to the photo-electric cell for automatic dimming of the LCD. The display illumination is adapted to the ambient brightness by means of additional electronic circuitry.

5.3.3 Function

10 The data received from AHD 903-15 data stations is distributed to one or more displays depending on the number of measuring points. Buttons on the front panel enable the user to browse through the pages. A maximum of 18 measuring values can be displayed on one page using the tabular mode, while the graphical mode can display a maximum of 8 measuring values including additional information. Tabular and graphic displays can be combined arbitrarily in one system.

5.3.4 Interfaces

There are 7 additional serial inputs and outputs using the same hardware as the interface for communication with the data stations.

11 524ab1-e.mcd 50

) 53deep

u 60

(

c 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2

a 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1

i r

p t

O i

LCD -MONITOR AHD 524 524 AHD -MONITOR LCD 50 : : 24VDC 25% ± : app.0.5 A : x8 bi-directional(TTY-current-loop) x2 RS232C (optional) : 99% : 54IP at front side : max.8mm : 1.2 kg :185mm x 137mm 524ab1-e 53deep 75 20-pole ribbon cable 20-poleribbon 26-pole ribbon cable 26-poleribbon 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 TECHNICAL DATA Power supply Power consumpt.of electronics In-/outputs Perm. rel. air humidity Protection class Perm. thickness of desk Weight Panelcut-out

)

' s Ü # l > ? ß

G ESC PAUSE Enter DRUCK

(

e desk,max. 8 thick

5 . \ :

/ h * - < _ Ö + F6

F 1

F12 M

0 $ Ä F5

L 6 3

9 9

E Z F11 Bild Bild NUM ALT

H ' § %

5 2 F4

K F10

R Y

D Entf.

3 = !

4 0

J 7 F9 F3

Q X Einf.

C Pos 1

o Ende

r t

p a

r ; , ) "

s n

I F2

B Strg

W Funct

u (aufklappbar)

s Frontaufsatz mit O-Ring-Abdichtung mit Frontaufsatz

( C 9 F7 F8 F1

A H

e SPACE

d p

K a T Hinge Photo resistor Photo AHD 524 AHD CONTRAST DIM 27C256 IS MAX 28C256 500 0 372 400 365 400 35 463 35 33 463 37 31 461 39 35 465 35 32 462 38 30 460 40 35 465 35 33 463 37 32 462 38 35 465 35 31 461 39 37 467 33 30 460 40

1 - Rearview + INFO PANEL 4 : E MIN

CYLINDER 1 °C CYLINDER 2 °C CYLINDER 3 °C CYLINDER 4 °C CYLINDER 5 °C CYLINDER 6 °C CYLINDER 7 °C CYLINDER 8 °C CYLINDER 9 °C CYLINDER 10 °C CYLINDER 11 °C CYLINDER 12 °C AFTER TURBO A °C AFTER TURBO B °C AVERAGE VALUE MAX CYLINDERTEMP. BLOCKING RANGE 20 ON 146

12 6. Commissioning of the exhaust gas average value control

6.1 General features

The system is programmed ex-works according to the measuring point list attached to this documentation. A keyboard type PC Mini 5 is necessary to execute changes and/or to adjust the average value on completion of commissioning.

Please check carefully to ensure that the system is wired correctly. Are the jumpers at the analogue data station AHD 903-15 (terminal 5 and 6, or 9 and 10) attached correctly? Is the sensor for ambient temperature compensation connected and fixed at the right position where the thermocoupler amplifier is installed? If multiple-core cables are used, any free wires have to be earthed at both ends.

6.2 System start

The system is switched on by connecting the supply terminals of all devices with 24VDC +/-25%. When engine is cold, all actual values have to correspond to the temperature to which the sensor for ambient temperature compensation is exposed.

6.3 Programming by means of external keyboard type PC Mini 5

The externally connectable keyboard offers the possibility to extensively configure the system and thus to address and program all substations connected to the LCD monitor. More than one substation may be needed when the exhaust gas average value control is part of a larger alarm system, or where several diesel engines have one exhaust gas control each, or for engines with more than 12 cylinders.

First, the keyboard is connected by spiral cable to the corresponding 5-pole DIN socket, which is at the rear side of the monitor. By pressing ‘ENTER’ (below right), the main menu ‘Programming of the Control System’ is accessed. After the configuration, the main menu can be quit by pressing the ‘ESC’ button.

In case of any wrong entry or uncertainty, the main menu or the normal display mode can be accessed step by step (without any data changes) by pushing ‘ESC’ (below right just above the ‘ENTER’-button). If no entry is carried out within 3 minutes after a prompting message, the previously described ‘ESC’- function is executed internally. Thus, the system is always set back automatically into normal display mode after a certain interval.

Keyboard type PC Mini 5

13 After calling up the main menu by pressing the ‘ENTER’ button, the following display appears:

> Programming of the control system Main menu... (ESCAPE = End) ______

Actual substation no. = 1 Actual input terminal no. = 1

[A] ...Change act. substation no.

[B] ...Change act. input terminal no.

[C] ...Program analog inputs

[D] ...Program average value system

[E] ...Program data selector

[F] ...Program tank parameters

[G] ... Special function

Subsequently, only those menu options are described that are necessary for using the system as exhaust gas average value system. The options not mentioned here are, as far as necessary, configured ex-works.

- Function [A] : Changing (adjusting) the current substation no. :

With this function, the number or address of the connected substation (analogue data station AHD 903) is selected. All substations are configured ex-works, numbered (starting with address ‘1’) and pre-configured. The assignment of the substations to the single sensors (engines) has to be accurate. If there is only one substation, it has the address 1. This is usually the case for an exhaust gas average value system that is not part of an alarm system.

Enter the desired substation number and press ‘ENTER’. This function can be quit with key ‘ESC’.

- Function [D] : Programming average value system

A new submenu appears: ‘Programming of the exhaust gas average value control’ . Three functions are available which refer to the actually set substation number:

[A] => program limiting values [B] => calculate average value basis [C] => delete average value basis

14 - Subfunction [A] : Program limiting values

By means of this function, all limiting value parameters that are relevant for the exhaust gas average value control can be changed. A data field appears in which all limiting values can be set and edited. In each case, the flashing limiting value can be changed by overwriting it. The new data are not saved immediately after being entered, but only after completing the whole programming block. Pressing ‘ESC’ twice leads to immediate termination without changes.

The following functions are available for editing:

- Numeric value plus ‘ENTER’ overwrites previous value. - By pressing ‘ENTER’ without entering a numeric value the next parameter will be marked and no change of the actual value will be executed. - ‘Backspace’ (key to the left of 4) deletes the last entered character or cancels entry and jumps to previous parameter. - ‘ESC’ (once) skips all the parameters that would still have to be entered and calls up the close- off line.

After entering or skipping all parameters, the close-off line with three possible functions appears:

- ‘Backspace’ enables the user to return through the parameters and enter respective corrections - ‘ESC’ aborts the function and leaves everything unchanged. - ‘ENTER’ confirms entry, saves data internally and transmits parameters to the currently selected substation.

After saving the data by pressing ‘ENTER’, the user returns to the preceding menu (programming of the exhaust gas average value control). The same happens in case of termination with ‘ESC’.

In case no connection with the substation can be established, a corresponding warning message appears in the bottom line. In this case, the connection or substation number has to be checked and the procedure has to be repeated.

N.B.: In case of such a failure the new values will not have been transmitted to the substation even though they have been saved on the display.

UST: 1 > Progr. exhaust gas average value control

(ESC = End) ______

Permitted average value deviation block.-range. min : 60 Permitted average value deviation block.-range. max : 60 Permitted average value deviation max. cyl.-temp. min: 45 Permitted average value deviation max. cyl.-temp. max: 45 Max. cylinder temperature: 555 Max. temperature before turbo charger: 480 Max. temperature after turbo charger: 520 Blocking range: 250

______

ESC = Abort <- = correction ENTER = save, end

15 Subfunction [B] : Execute average value adjustment

This function enables the user to perform a cylinder temperature average value adjustment, by means of which all cylinder temperatures can be equalised mathematically by offset-addition. On the upper left the actual substation no. is displayed whose correctness should be checked. As a safety measure, the adjustment command has to be reconfirmed with key ‘X’, as this is a critical function that overwrites the values of a previous adjustment.

This function can be quit with ‘ESC’ or any other key.

Subfunction [C] : Delete adjustment data

This function cancels a cylinder temperature average value adjustment that has been executed with menu option ‘B’. The offset-addition is reset to ‘zero’. The reset command now has to be reconfirmed with key ‘X’.

This function can be quit with ‘ESC’ or any other key.

16 abg-date.mcd

MEASURING POINT LIST FOR EXH. GAS AVERAGE VALUE SYSTEM

This data sheet must be filled out be the customer. It is the basis for the factory-made design. Mistakes or missing information will lead to delays during installation and commissioning.

Length of the 26-pole ribbon cable for the LCD-Monitor AHD 524 ? ...... m (2m, if not specified otherwise)

Amount of cylinders?

Sensor before turbo charger?

Sensor after turbo charger?

End of blocking range (beginning of supervision) °C

Max. cylinder temperature °C Max. average value deviation from end of blocking range into "plus-direction" (see A in pict. 1) °C Max. average value deviation from end of blocking range °C into "minus-direction" (see B in pict. 1) Max. average value deviation at cylinder temperature °C max. into "plus-direction (see Y in pict. 1) Max. average value deviation at cylinder temperature °C max. into "minus-direction" (see X in pict. 1)

Relays (1 relay k1 to k4 Relay Function possible per function) 1. Exh. gas average value deviation 2. Temperature before turbo max. 3. Temperature after turbo max. 4. Temperature of one cylinder max. 5. Collective report from 1. to 4. 6. Collective report sensor failure 7. Collective report from 1. to 6.

Relay Function k1 k2 k3 k4

Relay works as first value indicator Relay works as new value indicator only for control purposes Relay normally open Relay normally closed only for control purposes Every relay k1 to k4 can be defined as normally open or closed. The normal status is, when there is no alarm active that is assigned to a relay. Also, every relay can operate as first value indicator or new value indicator. First value indicator means that the relay switches in the event of an assigned alarm. In case another assigned alarm is activated, this will not change the relay's switching condition. New value indicator means that the relay switches back into its normal status for about 2s, if a second alarm occurs that is assigned to it (collective alarm repetition). In case a relay is not assigned to any of the above functions, but still defined as normally closed, it has the function "system failure".

Customer Customer order no. Böning Com. no.

17 K3 abgans-e.mcd AHD 903R Relay unit K1 K2 K4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Relayfunctions: see measuringpoint oflist exh. gasaverage value system

with Pt100-diagram, diameter 5mm x 15mm long 15mm x 5mm diameter Pt100-diagram, with

Sensor for ambient temperature compensation temperature ambient for Sensor After turbo After

order- Before turbo Before list that is 14-pole ribboncable

Exhaust gasaverage value control

3536 37 3839 40 12 Cylinder

33 34 11 Cylinder Cylinder 10 Cylinder theinputs (seebelow)

abgans-e Cylinder 9 Cylinder -15 are usedas measuring

larity,the user should stickto

Cylinder 8 Cylinder

urbo". This is not necessary for

Cylinder 7 Cylinder Cylinder 6 Cylinder

AHD903-15

Cylinder 5 Cylinder

Analog stationdata

Cylinder 4 Cylinder Cylinder 3 Cylinder

5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 31 32 Cylinder 2 Cylinder

Cylinder 1 Cylinder ground (-) ground The drawing shows the system at full occupancy.The relatedversion can be seenin themeasuring point attached to this documentation. 40-poleribbon cable 5 16 Attention: Independent ofthe amount of cylinders, of the analog datastation AHD 903 points "before turbo" and "after t the amplifier AHD 903 V, but forc this pattern.

16-pole ribbon cable 24VDC±25% + - + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1

to terminal no. terminal to Output no. equal no. Output

' # 24VDC±25% > ? ß N U G ESC NiCrNi PAUSE Enter DRUCK . \ : / * - < ÖÜ _ + F6 T F M F12 + - + 33 34 AHD AHD 903V $ Ä F5 6 3 L 9 S E Z F11 Bild Bild NUM ALT Pluggable foil-keyboard Pluggable 5 Mini PC type AMPLIFIER FOR AMPLIFIER ' § % 8 5 2 F4 K F10 R Y D Entf. 14 THERMOCOUPLES 14 AMPLIFYING FACTOR: 100 FACTOR: AMPLIFYING ! = 1 4 0 J 7 F9 F3 Einf. X C Pos 1 Pos Ende

; , " 14 ) I P turbo After B Strg Funct

( F1 F2 F7 F8 VW A H OQ

SPACE 24VDC±25% 13 - turbo Before

+ +

12 Cylinder 12 Cylinder

11 Cylinder 11 Cylinder

AHD 524

10 Cylinder 10 Cylinder

CONTRAST

Cylinder 9 Cylinder

DIM 9

5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 S MAX S

8 500 8 Cylinder 0 372 400 372

35 463 35 35 463 365 400 365

33 463 37 463 33 39 461 31 35 465 35 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 31 32 30 460 40 460 30 35 465 35 37 463 33 38 462 32 35 465 35 39 461 31 33 467 37 40 460 30 32 462 38 462 32 26-pole 26-pole ribbon cable

7 °C °C °C 7 Cylinder 34-pole ribbon cable

- 6 Cylinder 6 Cylinder

+ 5 Cylinder 5 Cylinder

Cylinder 4 Cylinder 4

INFO

PANEL 4 : E MIN PANEL I : 4 E 3 CYLINDER 2 °C °C 2 CYLINDER °C 3 CYLINDER °C 4 CYLINDER °C 5 CYLINDER °C 6 CYLINDER °C 7 CYLINDER °C 8 CYLINDER °C 9 CYLINDER °C 10 CYLINDER °C 11 CYLINDER °C 12 CYLINDER °C TURBO BEFORE °C TURBO AFTER VALUE AVERAGE 3 Cylinder CYLINDER 1 °C °C 1 CYLINDER TEMP. CYLINDER MAX 20 RANGE BLOCKING ON

BÖNING Cylinder 2 Cylinder 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 yidr11 1 Cylinder 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 + - + Input no. Input